JP6799766B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a slot machine (rotary body game machine) and a pachinko machine (ball ball game machine).

Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as one of the game consoles. In this slot machine, when a medal is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button, the symbol display window is displayed. It is configured so that a combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed according to an internal decision. Then, when a winning combination with the payout of medals is established, a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the established winning combination are paid out.

Some of such game consoles perform so-called AT games in which information regarding the operation of the stop button for deriving a stop mode advantageous to the player is notified (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2016-87308

However, since it is easy to predict the expected profit during such an AT game, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. That is, there is still room for improvement in the game table provided with the AT game.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game table provided with a highly novel AT game.

In order to achieve the above object, the game console according to the present invention is, as one aspect,
An effect execution means for executing an expected effect indicating whether or not a predetermined privilege has been granted , and
The operation means operated by the player and
It is a game table equipped with
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the first expected effect .
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the second expected effect .
The first expected effect is an effect of displaying the first display indicating that the predetermined privilege has not been given while expecting the predetermined privilege to be given to the predetermined display device.
The first expected effect is an effect of displaying a second display indicating that the first expected effect is completed on the predetermined display device.
The first expected effect is an effect that starts displaying the second display after starting displaying the first display.
The second expected effect is an effect of displaying an operation promotion display prompting an operation on the operation means on the predetermined display device.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing an effect indicating that the predetermined privilege has been granted when there is an operation on the operation means after the operation promotion display is displayed.
The operation promotion display is a display that is started to be displayed after the first display is started.
The second display is a display that is started to be displayed during the display of the operation promotion display.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table provided with a highly novel AT game.

It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view in the state which the front door of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which develops and shows the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention in a plane. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination) of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. It is a figure explaining the small combination 3 shown in FIG. 5 in detail. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the RT system of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, and is the schematic diagram of the specified number of times lottery table used for the specified number of times lottery. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, and is the schematic diagram of the push order lottery table used for push order lottery. It is a figure explaining the notification mode of the operation navigation of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the operation navigation of the game which internally won the small winning combination 3 in the non-AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the operation navigation of the game which internally won the small winning combination 3 in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the operation navigation of the game which internally won the re-game combination 1 in the non-AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the operation navigation of the game which internally won the re-game combination 1 in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the execution state of the operation navigation in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt process of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the main control unit / operation condition display setting process in step S107 of FIG. 15, and (b) shows in detail the flow of the operation navigation setting process in step S202 of FIG. 17 (a). It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. The second sub-control unit main process, the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and the second sub-control unit image control process of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the operation navigation setting process of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention in detail (modification example). This is a production example of a small winning combination 3 winning suggestion effect of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention (modification example). It is a figure explaining the small role 3 of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention in detail (modification example). It is a figure explaining the execution state of the effect a in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention (a modification). It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the operation navigation of the game which internally won the small winning combination 4 of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the execution state of the operation navigation in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of the operation navigation of the game which internally won the small combination 3a, the small combination 4, or the replay combination 1 in the AT state of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a combination of symbols corresponding to the re-gaming role 1 of the slot machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a transition of the game state of the AT system, a notification mode of expectation effect, and a re-gaming combination. It is a figure which shows the execution state of the operation navigation of the game which was internally elected in 1. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the push order lottery table used when the re-game combination 1 in the AT state of the slot machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention is internally won, and (b) is a sense of expectation. It is a figure which shows the execution state of production and operation navigation. (A) is a diagram showing the transition of the AT system game state of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the notification mode of the expectation effect, and the execution status of the operation navigation of the game internally won for the re-game combination 1. , (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the push order lottery table used when the re-game combination 1 in the AT state is internally won. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the operation navigation with respect to the small winning combination 3a internal winning of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the execution state of the operation navigation in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the execution state of the operation navigation in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination) of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention, the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the RT system of the main control unit of the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention, the transition of the game state of AT system, and the number of games set in the expected state and the AT state. It is a schematic diagram explaining the content of the AT game number lottery of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the variation of the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention, and the figure explaining the limiter of the privilege period. It is a figure explaining the number of games of the first AT state and the number of games of the AT state after the second time in the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the AT transition lottery of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the transition time at the time of transition from the expected state to the AT state in the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a graph which shows the relationship between the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention, and the number of medals acquired. It is a figure explaining the effect of the expected state of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the story effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows an example of the execution pattern of the story effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the production progress of an example of the AT game number notification effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the notification number table of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the production progress of an example of the AT game number notification effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the production progress of an example of the AT game number notification effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the AT game number notification effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the AT game number notification effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the AT game number correction processing of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the content of the AT game number correction processing when the number of AT games is determined to be 70 games in the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the setting suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the execution time of the setting suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the game state control process in step S512 of FIG. 55, and (b) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT system game state control process in step S602 of FIG. 56 (a). is there. (A) is a flowchart showing in detail the internal lottery command processing of the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a flowchart showing in detail the game state command processing. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the counting process of the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the counting process of the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the content of the ending effect of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the erasing timing of the final game notice image in the ending effect of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the AT game number correction processing of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the setting suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the count processing of the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine of the prior art. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention (variant example). It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention (variant example). It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention (variant example). It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention (variant example). It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention (variant example). It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention (variant example). It is an external perspective view seen from the front side (player side) of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning line of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (left reel 2110, middle reel 2111, right reel 2112) of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention developed in a plane. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination) of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention, the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the number of giving each winning combination (the number of medals paid out). It is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart diagram which shows the flow of the effect at the end of the initial game number of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the kind of the effect which appears at the end of the initial game number of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart diagram which added the presence or absence of operation of the effect button by a player, and showed the flow of effect shown in FIG. 81 in more detail. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the effect executed at the end of the initial game number of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart diagram explaining the overlap period of the resurrection display 1 and the resurrection display 2 of the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the continuous effect executed in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the content of each effect which constitutes the continuous effect of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart diagram explaining the display timing of the end display 2 of the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention in comparison with the operation timing for the effect button 2171. It is a figure explaining the number of additional games of AT addition lottery of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt process of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. The second sub-control unit main process, the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and the second sub-control unit image control process of the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the effect control process of step S7104 of FIG. 92 (a) in detail. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect mode of the end effect 2 of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect mode of the revival effect 2 of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the operation acceptance period of the effect button of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of each million-sheet display of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view (the perspective view seen from the front side) which shows the appearance of the pachinko machine which concerns on another Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the figure seen from the back side) which shows the appearance of the pachinko machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special figure display device, the decorative symbol display device, the special figure which the pachinko machine which concerns on another Embodiment of this invention, a special figure display device which stops and displays, and the type of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of the main control part of the pachinko machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of the main control part of the pachinko machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing of the 1st sub-control unit of the pachinko machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing of the 2nd sub-control unit of the pachinko machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the image of the normal game and the time saving game of the pachinko machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the decorative symbol display device at the time of notifying the continuation of the time saving game in the tenth game of the time saving game of the pachinko machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the decorative symbol display device at the time of notifying the end of the time saving game in the tenth game of the time saving game of the pachinko machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the decorative symbol display device at the time of notifying the continuation of the time saving game by operating the chance button in the tenth game of the time saving game of the pachinko machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the decorative symbol display device at the time of notifying the continuation of a time-saving game without operating a chance button in the tenth game of the time-saving game of the pachinko machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<< Embodiment to limit operation navigation >>
In the first to fourth embodiments described below, the operation navigation (the effect of notifying the operation of the stop button for deriving the stop mode advantageous to the player) is restricted in the AT (assist time) game. It is composed of forms.

[First Embodiment]
The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that advances a series of games that end without paying out.

During a so-called AT (assist time) game, the stop operation tends to be monotonous. In particular, in an AT game, in a game in which information on forward push to stop in the order of left reel, middle reel, and right reel is notified, it is assumed that a predetermined profit is obtained by performing a stop operation according to the notified information. However, for the player, since it is the same as the stop operation that is usually performed, it may not be possible to obtain a very good feeling. On the other hand, in a game in which no information regarding the stop operation is notified in the AT game, the player may presume that he / she will not be able to obtain a profit and may feel bored.

The game console of the present embodiment is a game console that can improve the motivation to play without making the stop operation monotonous during the AT game.

<Overall configuration>
FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110-112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper stage (also referred to as display position 1) of the left reel 110 is the upper design on the left reel, and the design displayed on the middle stage (also referred to as display position 2) of the left reel 110 is the middle design on the left reel, left. The symbol displayed on the lower part of the reel 110 (also referred to as display position 3) is the lower part of the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the upper part of the middle reel 111 (also referred to as display position 4) is the upper part of the middle reel and the middle part of the middle reel 111. The symbol displayed in (also referred to as display position 5) is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed in the lower middle reel 111 (also referred to as display position 6) is the middle reel lower symbol, and the symbol displayed in the right reel 112 upper (display position 7). The symbol displayed on the right reel (also referred to as the display position 8) is on the right reel upper symbol, and the symbol displayed on the right reel 112 is on the right reel middle symbol and the right reel 112 is on the lower row (also referred to as display position 9). The displayed symbols are referred to as the lower symbols on the right reel, and each symbol on each reel 110-112 is displayed on each reel 110-112 in the vertical direction through the symbol display window 113, for a total of nine symbols.

Then, by rotating each reel 110-112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114. The valid winning line (hereinafter, also referred to as the valid line) is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

In the present embodiment, the middle horizontal winning line composed of the display positions 2, 5 and 8, the upper horizontal winning line composed of the display positions 1, 4 and 7, and the lower horizontal winning line composed of the display positions 3, 6 and 9. Five winning lines are set: a winning line, a right-up winning line composed of display positions 3, 5, and 7, and a right-down winning line composed of display positions 1, 5, and 9.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a game table that recommends betting three medals, and when the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) reaches the specified number (three), the above five winning lines become effective. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. The number of winning lines is not limited to five. Further, in a game with a non-recommended number of bets (a game with one or two bets), a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as a valid winning line.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special role (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp that informs you. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to notify that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert a medal at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. is there.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel to be operated to a second stop may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel to be operated to a third stop may be referred to as a third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The navigation generation state notification lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the main control unit 300 is in either the navigation generation state 1 or 2 described later (hereinafter, referred to as “in the navigation generation state”). The player can grasp that the navigation is in the navigation generation state from the lighting mode of the navigation generation state notification lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. The side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side plate 260 on the left side, houses the first sub control board in which the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is housed. A case 220 is arranged. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, etc. Supply to the control unit and each device. Further, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (illustrated) for controlling the effect device 160 are on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157. Omitted), an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing position, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main processing of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 to detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the closing operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. The above sensors may be non-contact type sensors or contact type sensors.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertable lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display A drive circuit 328 for driving 125, a game information display 126, a payout number display 127, and a navigation generation status notification lamp 190) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage is less than 9v) is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and is capable of communicating with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various indicators, and the like are stored. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) via an input / output interface. Is connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and uses the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 1504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each reel 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the figure is a view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a plane developed.

On each reel 110-112, a plurality of types (10 types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in the present embodiment). .. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, a "bell symbol" is arranged on the number 1 frame of the left reel 110, a "replay symbol" is arranged on the number 0 frame of the middle reel 111, and a "watermelon symbol" is arranged on the number 0 frame of the right reel 112. ing.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2) and a general role (replaying role 1 to replaying role 3, small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 4). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles that shift to a special gaming state (also referred to as RT3, which will be described in detail later) in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 3 are roles that enable re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations are sometimes referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the effective line. For example, the special combination 1, The special role 2 and the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 3 are included in the prize.

Special roles 1 and 2 (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as "special roles") are roles (actuating roles) that shift to the special gaming state (RT3) by winning a prize. However, no medals will be paid out for winning the role itself. In the corresponding symbol combination, the special role 1 is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1 (BB1)" or "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2 (BB2)", and the special role 2 is "BAR-BAR-BAR". (RB) ".

When the special combination is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When this flag is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special role internal winning state (also referred to as RT2, which will be described in detail later). This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role that was internally won in the special role 1 or 2 is not won, the special role will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, the special role) If 1 is internally won, "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1 (BB1)" or "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2 (BB2)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win a prize.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the internally won special combination. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of sheets are paid out, the state shifts to the normal state (also referred to as RT1-1. Details will be described later).

Re-games 1-3 (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as "re-games") are prize-winning roles (operations) that allow a player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. It is a role), and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "replay-replay-replay" for replay 1 (also called "normal replay") and "replay-replay-bell" for replay 2 (also called "promotion replay 1"). , Replay role 3 (also referred to as "promotion replay 2") is "bell-replay-replay".

The main control unit 300 sets the game state to the navigation generation state 1 (also referred to as RT1-2. Details will be described later) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 2 in the normal state (RT1-1). Migrate to. Further, based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 3 in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the game state is shifted to the navigation generation state 2 (also referred to as RT1-3, details will be described later). Let me.

"Small roles 1 to 4" (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as "small roles") are prize-winning roles in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a prize, and the corresponding symbol combination is small role 1 (also referred to as "watermelon"). "Watermelon-watermelon-watermelon", small role 2 (also called "cherry") is "ANY-cherry-ANY", small role 3 (also called "Oshijun bell") is "bell-bell-bell" , Small role 4 (also called "common bell") is "bell-bell-bell". The corresponding payout number is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

In the present embodiment, the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) and the small winning combination 2 (cherry) each win a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the internal lottery process and the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. In addition, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is won when the winning combination is internally won in the internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Also known as Oshijun. On the other hand, the small winning combination 4 (common bell) always wins a prize regardless of the content of the stop operation (operation order, operation timing) when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process. It is also called the role of pull-in 1 and the role of unquestioned push order.

In the present embodiment, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is a pushing order combination, the small winning combination 4 (common bell), and the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) is a push order unquestioned combination.

In the present embodiment, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) and the small winning combination 4 (common bell) have the same symbol combination, and the number of medals awarded is also the same. When the symbol combination of "bell" is displayed, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the small role 3 (pushing order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell). Below, if you win internally in either small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) or small winning combination 4 (common bell) and the "bell-bell-bell" symbol combination is displayed on the valid line, you will win a "bell prize". May be said.

The small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is set so that the profitability differs depending on the operation order from the first stop operation to the third stop operation for the player's stop buttons 137 to 139. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is subdivided into small winning combination 3a, small winning combination 3b, small winning combination 3c, small winning combination 3d, small winning combination 3e, and small winning combination 3f. Has been done. The internal winning probabilities of these six roles are the same.

For example, (1) when the small winning combination 3a is internally won, a stop operation is performed in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112 (hereinafter, "" (Abbreviated as "left, middle, right") is the stop operation of the correct answer, and if this stop operation of the correct answer is performed, the small winning combination 3a will be won and eight medals will be paid out, while the stop other than this correct answer will be stopped. If the operation is performed, the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) will not be won and eight medals will not be paid out. Similarly, (2) when the small winning combination 3b is internally won, the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111 (hereinafter, , "Abbreviated as" right, left, middle ") is the correct stop operation, and (c) if the small winning combination 3c is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the first. 3 The stop operation with the stop reel as the left reel 110 (hereinafter abbreviated as "middle right left") is the correct stop operation, and (d) when the small winning combination 3d is internally won, the first stop reel is left. The stop operation (hereinafter abbreviated as "left and right middle") in which the reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111 is the correct stop operation, and (e) small winning combination 3e. If the internal winning is won, the correct answer is the stop operation (hereinafter abbreviated as "middle left and right") in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. (F) When the small winning combination 3f is internally won, the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. (Hereinafter, abbreviated as "right, middle, left") is the correct stop operation.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is not set so that the profitability differs depending on the operation order from the first stop operation to the third stop operation for the player's stop buttons 137 to 139. , If you win the small role 4 (common bell) internally, you will always win the small role 4 (common bell) and 8 medals will be paid out regardless of the operation order of the above 6 options. ..

If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "loss". In addition, the fact that the winning combination was not won may be expressed as "winning a loss".

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state described below is a random number obtained at the time of the internal lottery by acquiring numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306. It is obtained by dividing by the numerical data (for example, 65535) in the numerical range. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination or loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. Actually, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one combination, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. .. The set value is for adjusting the ratio of the total number of game media paid out by the game table to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when the game is played for a predetermined period. It is a value of, so-called "payout rate", and can be set in a plurality of stages of set values, for example, setting "1" to setting "6".

Although the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) of the present embodiment is set as a single winning combination, it may be set as a duplicate winning combination that simultaneously wins a plurality of winning combinations. For example, the small winning combination 3 and the small winning combination 5 (not shown) and the small winning combination 6 (not shown) may be set as winning combinations at the same time. In this case, when the correct answer stop operation is performed, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is won, and when the incorrect answer stopping operation is performed, another small winning combination is won or lost. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won and the correct answer is stopped, the small winning combination 3 is won and eight medals are paid out, while the incorrect answer is stopped. When the operation was performed, the small role 3 was not won and the medal was not paid out. However, when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) as described above is set as a duplicate winning combination, if the duplicated winning combination is internally won, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) wins when the correct answer is stopped. Eight medals may be paid out based on the above, and a predetermined number of medals less than eight may be paid out based on the other small winning combination prizes at the time of the stop operation of one incorrect answer. That is, in the case of the incorrect answer stop operation, fewer medals may be paid out than in the case of the correct answer stop operation.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. The reel stop control is performed by selecting one of a plurality of types of reel stop control data determined in advance based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process for a winning combination described later) and stopping the selected reel. Perform based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data has an allowance control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display any combination of winning combinations on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, the case where a certain winning combination is internally won, or the case where a special combination is internally winning (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed in the same range within the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, when the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is internally won, the watermelon symbols are arranged in more than 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbols will be on the winning line. Do not stop.

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example of prohibition control, for example, when the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (flag is being carried over), the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed in the same range within the above number of frames.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 7A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly classified into a normal state (RT1-1), a navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), a navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), and a special role internal winning state (RT2). , And have a special gaming state (RT3). The normal state (RT1-1), the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), and the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) are also collectively referred to as the "normal game state". Further, the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) and the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) may be collectively referred to as the "navigation generation state" as described above. The navigation in the navigation generation state means the operation navigation, and the operation navigation will be described in detail in the AT-type game state described later. In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these five are referred to as RT-type gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter, referred to as an AT system game state), and according to the AT system game state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 is designed to set the gaming state.

Hereinafter, the game state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Normal state (RT1-1)>
In the normal state (RT1-1), the result of the internal lottery is generally lost (no internal winning of any of the special role, the re-game combination, and the small combination), or the stop display result is any combination. It is set that the stop display result of the loss that does not correspond to the symbol combination of is generally derived, and the total number of medals to be acquired is less than the total number of inserted medals. Therefore, the normal state (RT1-1) is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

The normal state (RT1-1) is set in the initial state, and when the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) or the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is executed a specified number of operation navigations (details). Will be described later), or when a specified number of medals are paid out in the special game state (RT3) (details will be described later), the normal state (RT1-1) is set.

On the other hand, in the normal state (RT1-1), when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 2 (promotion replay 1) is displayed on the valid line (when the re-game combination 2 is won), the navigation generation state Shift to 1 (RT1-2). In addition, when the special role is internally won, the state shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT2), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed on the valid line (when the special role is won). , Shift to the special game state (RT3).

<Navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2)>
In the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), when the AT system game state is in the AT state, the operation navigation is performed in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) or the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. It is a game state to be executed.

In the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 (promotion replay 1) is displayed on the valid line in the normal state (RT1-1) (replay combination 2 is won). If) is set.

Here, when the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is set, the specified number of times lottery using the specified number of times lottery table shown in FIG. 7B is executed, and either 1, 2 or 3 is specified. Set to the number of times. Here, in the case of the present embodiment, the specified number of times means the maximum number of operation navigations executed by internally winning the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell), and when the specified number of operation navigations are executed, the navigation is performed. The generation state 1 (RT1-2) ends and shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). For example, when 3 is set as the specified number of times, when the operation navigation for the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) internal winning is executed three times in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the navigation generation state 1 (navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2)) RT1-2) ends.

In the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed on the valid line (when the replay combination 3 is won), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) ), And when the operation navigation is executed a specified number of times in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). In addition, when the special role is internally won, the state shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT2), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed on the valid line (when the special role is won). , Shift to the special game state (RT3).

<Navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3)>
Similar to the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) or the replaying combination 1 (when the AT system gaming state is in the AT state). This is a game state in which operation navigation is executed in a game that is internally won in (normal replay).

In the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 (promotion replay 2) is displayed on the valid line in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) (replay combination 2). If you win a prize), it will be set. That is, when the replay combination 3 (promotion replay 2) is won before all the operation navigations of the specified number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) are executed in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is set.

Here, when the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is set, the specified number of times lottery using the specified number of times lottery table shown in FIG. 7C is executed, and either 30, 40 or 50 is specified. Set to the number of times. For example, when the specified number of times is 30, when the operation navigation for the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) internal winning is executed 30 times in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) ) Ends. Since the specified number of times set in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is larger than the specified number of times set in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the navigation generation state 2 is set from the viewpoint of the navigation generation state period. (RT1-3) is a state more advantageous than the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2).

When the operation navigation is executed a specified number of times in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). In addition, when the special role is internally won, the state shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT2), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed on the valid line (when the special role is won). , Shift to the special game state (RT3).

<Special role internal winning state (RT2)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to on, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, this flag is set. It is a gaming state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding special role can be displayed.

The special combination internal winning state (RT2) is set when the special combination is internally won in the normal gaming state (normal state, navigation generation state 1, navigation generation state 2). On the other hand, in the special combination internal winning state (RT2), when the symbol combination corresponding to the internally winning special combination is displayed, the process shifts to the special gaming state (RT3).

<Special game state (RT3)>
The special gaming state (RT3) is a gaming state that is profitable for the player. That is, in the special gaming state (RT3), the total number of medals to be acquired exceeds the total number of inserted medals.

The special gaming state (RT3) is set when a special winning combination is won in the normal gaming state (normal state, navigation generation state 1, navigation generation state 2), or in the special role internal winning state (RT2). .. On the other hand, in the special game state (RT3), when the specified number of sheets is paid out, the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special game state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, when the payout of more than 300 medals is completed, the normal state (RT1-1) ). In addition, when the state shifts to the special game state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1) when the payout of more than 100 medals is completed. To do.

In this embodiment, the special game state (RT3) ends when a predetermined number of cards are paid out, but for example, a game ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or even a predetermined number. It may be terminated when the winning number of times (for example, 8 times) has been won, or when the game has been played a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the player wins the replay combination 2 (promotion replay 2) in the normal state (RT1-1), the game shifts to the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), but the normal state (RT1-1) In, when the player is internally elected to the replay combination 2 (promotion replay 2), the game may shift to the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2). Similarly, when the player wins the replay combination 3 (promotion replay 3) in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the transition to the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) occurs, but the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) ), When the player is internally elected to the replay combination 3 (promotion replay 3), the system may shift to the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the special game state (RT3) ends, the game uniformly shifts to the normal state (RT1-1), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) becomes a special role. In the case of shifting to the internal winning state (RT2) and the special gaming state (RT3), when the special gaming state (RT3) ends, the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) may be shifted.

Further, in the normal game state of the present embodiment, the change of the internal winning probability of the re-game combination is not particularly mentioned, but the internal winning probability of the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is changed to the other normal game state (RT1). It may be set higher than -1, RT1-2).

<AT game state>
FIG. 8A is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The AT-type gaming state is roughly classified into a non-AT state and an AT state. The AT state refers to a state in which a notification effect (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation") relating to the content of the stop operation can be executed, and the non-AT state means a state in which the operation navigation cannot be executed. That is, the AT state refers to a game state in which the operation navigation including the operation timing or the operation order of the stop operation is executed so as to bring an advantageous result to the player. In the present embodiment, when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won in the AT state, more specifically, the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f is internally won among the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell). If so, the operation navigation showing the correct operation order is executed (the reason will be described later).

In the present embodiment, when the AT start condition is satisfied in the non-AT state, a predetermined number of AT games is given and the AT state is started. The AT start condition of the present embodiment is established based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery. Further, in the AT state, when all the assigned AT games are exhausted, the AT state ends and the game shifts to the non-AT state.

Here, the number of AT games in this embodiment means the number of operation navigations for the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) internal winning, that is, the specified number of times described above.

The navigation generation state is a state in which "operation navigation" can be executed from its name, but since the RT system game state and the AT system game state are not necessarily linked, "operation" is performed even in the navigation generation state. "Navi" may not be executed. For example, in a state where the AT start condition of the normal state (RT1-1) is not satisfied, even if the player wins the re-game combination 2, the system shifts to the navigation generation state (RT1-2), but the AT state is not satisfied. "Operation navigation" is not executed. Similarly, in the state where the AT start condition of the navigation generation state (RT1-2) is not satisfied, even if the player wins the re-game combination 3, the system shifts to the navigation generation state (RT1-3), but in the AT state. Since there is no such thing, "operation navigation" is not executed.

When the operation navigation is executed a specified number of times in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the AT system gaming state in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is in the AT state, so that it is in the normal state (RT1- It shifts to 1) and shifts to the non-AT state. Similarly, when the operation navigation is executed a specified number of times in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), the AT system game state in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is in the AT state, so that the normal state ( It shifts to RT1-1) and shifts to the non-AT state.

<Operation navigation>
In the present embodiment, in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) or the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, (1) operation navigation by the main control unit 300, and (2) first sub The operation navigation by the control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 is executed. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as "operation navigation", both operation navigations (1) and (2) are included. The operation navigation of the present embodiment notifies the operation sequence from the first stop operation to the third stop operation. That is, the operation order of one of the six "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right left middle", and "right middle left" is notified.

Explaining in detail the operation navigation in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won, in the present embodiment, the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. That is, the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f in the AT state are internally won. In the game in which the small role 3a in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation is not executed when the content of the operation navigation is "left middle right" forward push, and the player presses "left middle right" forward. This is because the player does not feel much gained because it is the same as the normal stop operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is decided not to execute the operation navigation in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in which the correct stop operation order is "left, middle, right" is internally won. In addition, even if the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, in most cases, the player performs the forward pressing stop operation of "left middle right", and as a result, the small winning combination It is expected to win 3 prizes.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed not only in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won in the AT state, but also in the game in which the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. This is because the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. The correct stop operation order of the small winning combination 3a is "left, middle, right". If the operation navigation is executed only in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation indicating the forward pressing of "left middle right" is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed even in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won, and the operation navigation indicating the forward push of "left middle right" is executed. The content of the operation navigation in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won is determined by the push order lottery executed by the main control unit 300.

FIG. 8B is a table schematically showing the contents of the push order lottery table used in the push order lottery. In the push order lottery of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, the operation order from the first stop operation to the third stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is set as the correct operation order. That is, the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a combination that wins a prize in any of the stop operations, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, one of the so-called 6 choices is selected. It is decided as a stop operation of the correct answer by the push order lottery. Specifically, the winning probability of the forward push of "left middle right" is 7/12, and the other operation order is 1/12, respectively, and the operation navigation of the forward push of "left middle right" The probability of executing is high. As described above, in the game in which the small role 3 is internally won, the operation navigation of "left middle right" is not executed, so that all the games (small role 3b to 3f or the re-game combination 1) that execute the operation navigation in the AT state In the game in which one of them is internally elected), the operation contents of the six choices are set to be notified substantially uniformly.

In this way, in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell; excluding the small winning combination 3a) or the small winning combination 4 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the main control unit 300 notifies the operation navigation (stop operation order). ) Is determined, so that the main control unit 300 is a command indicating the notification content of the operation navigation in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell; excluding the small winning combination 3a) or the small winning combination 4 (normal replay) is internally won. (Internal winning command, push order command) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, in the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, it is possible to notify the same notification content as the operation navigation by the main control unit 300.

Here, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is specifically a 7-segment lighting effect using the payout number display device 127, and the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500. Specifically, is an audio output effect using the speakers 272 and 277, and an image display effect using the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the operation navigation system by the main control unit 300. For example, when the next stop operation is a stop operation for the left reel 110, the 7-segment data displaying the letter "L" is selected, the payout number display 127 is turned on, and the next stop operation is the middle reel 111. If the stop operation is for the right reel 112, select the 7-segment data that displays the letter "C" and turn on the payout number display 127. If the next stop operation is for the right reel 112, " Select the 7-segment data that displays the letter "R" and turn on the payout number display 127.

FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500. For example, when "left, middle, right" is selected as the notification content of the operation navigation, a character image in which the number "123" is drawn from left to right is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. .. Hereinafter, the character image of the operation navigation is referred to as the operation navigation image d10.

FIG. 9 (c) shows the transition of the notification mode of the operation navigation when "right, middle, left" is selected as the notification content of the operation navigation. At the time t1A of the start lever operation, the slot machine 100 displays the character "R" on the payout number display 127 and displays the operation navigation image d10 composed of the characters "321" on the liquid crystal display device 157. In addition, the "right" sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277. As a result, the player can grasp that the right reel 112 is the first stop reel. Next, the slot machine 100 displays the character "C" on the payout number display device 127 and the character "32" on the liquid crystal display device 157 at the time t1B when the first stop operation is performed. The navigation image d10 is displayed. In addition, "medium" sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277. As a result, the player can grasp that the middle reel 111 is the second stop reel. Next, the slot machine 100 displays the character "C" on the payout number display device 127 and the character "3" on the liquid crystal display device 157 at the time t1C when the second stop operation is performed. The navigation image d10 is displayed. In addition, the "left" sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277. As a result, the player can grasp that the left reel 110 is the third stop reel. Finally, the slot machine 100 ends the display of the payout number display 127 and ends the display of the operation navigation image d10 of the liquid crystal display device 157 when the third stop operation is performed.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining whether or not the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the non-AT state is internally won.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the non-AT state, the slot machine 100 does not execute the operation navigation in the game in which the winning combination of the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f is internally won. Further, in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won in the non-AT state, the main control unit 300 internally wins any of the internal winning commands (small winning combination 3a to small winning combination 3f) indicating the small winning combination 3. Information that is unknown whether it was done) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. This is because the operation navigation is not executed in the non-AT state, so it is not necessary to transmit information regarding the correct operation order. As a result, even if the command is illegally analyzed by a third party, the correct operation order is not grasped.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won.

As shown in FIG. 11, in the AT state, the slot machine 100 does not execute the operation navigation in (1) the game in which the small winning combination 3a is internally won, but (2) any of the small winning combination 3b to 3f. Execute the operation navigation in the game in which the role is internally won.

Specifically, in the game in which the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the AT state, the main control unit 300 receives an internal winning command indicating the small winning combination 3 (although it can be seen that the small winning combination 3 has been internally won, the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f). Information that it is unknown which combination of the above was won internally) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In this case, since the operation navigation is not executed even in the AT state, it is not necessary to transmit the information regarding the correct operation order. As a result, even if the command is analyzed illegally by a third party, the correct operation order is not grasped.

On the other hand, in the game in which the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f is internally won in the AT state, the main control unit 300 performs an internal winning command (internal) indicating the internally winning small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f. Information indicating the winning combination and also information indicating the operation order of the correct answer) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. This is because the operation navigation is executed in this case.

As a result, in the game in which any of the small wins 3b to 3f in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 is executed. (See FIG. 9 (c)).

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining whether or not the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) in the non-AT state is internally won.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the non-AT state, the slot machine 100 does not execute the operation navigation in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. Further, in a game in which the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won in the non-AT state, the main control unit 300 issues an internal winning command indicating the internal winning of the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) to the first sub-control unit 400. Send to.

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining whether or not the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the AT state, the slot machine 100 executes the operation navigation in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. Specifically, in the internally won game of the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state, the main control unit 300 has an internal lottery command indicating the internal winning of the re-game combination 1 and push order information indicating the correct operation order. A push order command including the above is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The push order information is information determined by the push order lottery (see FIG. 8B).

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an execution status of the operation navigation in the AT state. As a summary of the description using FIGS. 10 to 13, in the AT state, the slot machine 100 has a replay combination 1 (normal replay) or a small combination 3 (pushing order bell) of any of the small combinations 3b to 3f. ) Is internally won, the operation navigation is executed, and the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a is internally won.

<Operation of slot machine>
Hereinafter, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 15 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line determination process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number value generation circuit 316 is performed.

In step S105, the winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104, and the internal lottery is performed. Preparations are made for transmitting an internal lottery command indicating the result to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

Here, the internal lottery command when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won will be described. (1) When the AT system game state is in the non-AT state, the small winning combination 3 is internally won. (It is unknown which of the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f was internally won), and (2-1) when the AT system game state is in the AT state and the small winning combination 3a is internally won. Sends information indicating that the small winning combination 3 has been internally won (it is unknown that the small winning combination 3a has been internally won), while (2-2) the AT system game state is in the AT state, and the small winning combination 3b ~ When any of the small winning combinations 3f is internally won, information indicating that the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f has been internally won is transmitted.

In step S106, the reel stop data selection process for selecting the reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In step S107, the main control unit / operation condition display setting process (detailed later) for setting the operation navigation of the main control unit 300 is executed.

In step S108, the reel rotation start process is executed to start the rotation of all the reels 110 to 112.

In step S109, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of the reel stop data is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of lead-in frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, the stop button reception command for the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been stopped (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). For the third stop operation, the stop button reception 2 command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel is prepared. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning combination processing, when a pattern combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small winning combination 1 (watermelon). Further, in this step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, the medal granting process is performed. In the medal granting process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state (RT system game state, AT system game state) is performed, and the game state is transferred when the start condition or end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current game state.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing.

The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S1006 of FIG. 16) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S1001, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S1002, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur when the count value of the WDT314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S1003, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S1004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S1005, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S1006, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S1007, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S1008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S1003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 336, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S1009, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S1011. When the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S1010.

In step S1010, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S1001 is set in each original register. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S1011, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Main control unit / operation condition display setting process>
Next, the main control unit / operating condition display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 17A. FIG. 17A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the main control unit / operating condition display setting process in step S107 of FIG.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the AT state. If the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the AT state, the process proceeds to step S202, and if not, the main control unit / operation condition display setting process is terminated.

In step S202, the operation navigation setting process (detailed later) related to the operation navigation setting is executed.

<Operation navigation setting process>
Next, the operation navigation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 17B. FIG. 17B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the operation navigation setting process in step S202 of FIG. 17A.

In step S301, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won in the game. If the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won, the process proceeds to step S302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 3a is internally won among the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell). If the small winning combination 3a is internally won, the operation navigation setting process is terminated. If not, that is, if any of the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f is internally won, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed with the operation order of the correct answer of the internally won small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) as the content of the operation navigation. For example, when the small winning combination 3b is internally won, the effect setting of the operation navigation indicating the operation order of "right, left, middle" is performed. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C). After the end of step S303, the operation navigation setting process ends. Since the main control unit 300 has transmitted an internal lottery command indicating that any of the small winning combinations 3b to 3f has been internally won to the first sub control unit 400 (see step S105 in FIG. 15), the first The 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 execute operation navigation by the 1st sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 based on the contents of the received internal lottery command (FIG. 9B). (C).

In step S304, it is determined whether or not the re-game combination 1 (normal bell) has been internally won in the game. If the re-game combination 1 (normal bell) is internally won, the process proceeds to step S305. If not, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S305, the push order lottery is executed to determine the operation content of the correct answer, and the determined operation content of the correct answer is set as the content of the operation navigation. For details, operate one of the six options of "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right middle left", and "right middle left". (See FIG. 8 (b)).

In step S306, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed according to the contents of the operation navigation determined in step S305. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C). Further, in step S306, preparations are made for transmitting a push order command including the operation content (push order information) of the operation navigation to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 execute the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 based on the contents of the received push order commands (FIG. 9 (b) (c)).

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 18A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 18B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 18C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 18A.

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, the effect control process is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing the effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated. For example, in the present embodiment, in the AT state, when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell; excluding the small winning combination 3a) or the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won, the first sub-control unit 400 / first 2 The operation navigation is set by the sub control unit 500.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S3007, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S3008, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is a shutter control command in the effect data read in step S3005, the shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S3009, information output processing for setting to send a command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S3005, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 18B. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 18A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S3202, the command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3608, the effect random number value is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 19A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 19B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 19C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 19D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 19A, various initial settings are performed. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003.

In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4005, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S4004, the process corresponding to this command is performed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, when the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is executed, the image control for displaying the operation navigation image is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 19B. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 19A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S4202, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4303. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S4301, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4306. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered.

In step S4306, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation of the forward pressing of "left middle right" is not executed, so that the forward pressing of "left middle right" is performed. There is a gameplay that reduces the amount of profit when executing the operation navigation of. However, even if there is no operation navigation in the AT state, the player usually stops the forward push of "left, middle, right", and this operation causes the small winning combination 3 (pushing order). Bell) may be won. As a result, the player can improve the motivation to play the game without making the stop operation monotonous even in the game without the operation navigation in the AT state.

<Modification example>
In the above embodiment (first embodiment), the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. However, even in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, in the game in which the re-game combination 1 in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation is always executed, but the operation navigation may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, in the game in which the other winning combination in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail a modified example of the operation navigation setting process of the present embodiment (first embodiment). In this modified example, the operation navigation can be executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a, the replaying combination 1, and the loss are internally won.

In step S401, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won in the game. If the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won, the process proceeds to step S402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S407.

In step S402, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 3a is internally won among the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell). If the small winning combination 3a is internally won, the process proceeds to step S404. If not, that is, if any of the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f is internally won, the process proceeds to step S403.

In step S403, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed with the operation order of the correct answer of the internally won small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) as the content of the operation navigation. For example, when the small winning combination 3b is internally won, the effect setting of the operation navigation indicating the operation order of "right, left, middle" is performed. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C). After the end of step S403, the operation navigation setting process ends. Since the main control unit 300 has transmitted an internal lottery command indicating that any of the small winning combinations 3b to 3f has been internally won to the first sub control unit 400 (see step S105 in FIG. 15), the first The 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 execute operation navigation by the 1st sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 based on the contents of the received internal lottery command (FIG. 9B). (C).

In step S404, an operation navigation execution lottery is performed. The operation navigation execution lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the operation navigation. Specifically, the winning probability of the operation navigation execution lottery when the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) is internally won is 1/2.

In step S405, if the result of the operation navigation execution lottery in step S404 is won, the process proceeds to step S406, and if not, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S406, the effect setting of the operation navigation is set with the operation order of the correct answer of the internally won small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) as the content of the operation navigation. Specifically, the effect setting of the operation navigation indicating the operation order of "left, middle, right" is performed. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C).

Further, in step S405, preparations are made for transmitting a push order command including the operation content (push order information) of the operation navigation to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 execute the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 based on the contents of the received push order commands (FIG. 9 (b) (c)). After the end of step S406, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S407, it is determined whether or not the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won in the game. If the player wins the replay 1 (normal replay) internally, the process proceeds to step S408. If not, the process proceeds to step S412.

In step S408, an operation navigation execution lottery is performed. The operation navigation execution lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the operation navigation. Specifically, the winning probability of the operation navigation execution lottery when the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won is 1/4.

In step S409, if the result of the operation navigation execution lottery in step S408 is won, the process proceeds to step S410, and if not, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S410, the push order lottery is executed to determine the operation content of the correct answer, and the determined operation content of the correct answer is set as the content of the operation navigation. For details, operate one of the six choices of "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right middle left", and "right middle left". (See FIG. 8 (b)).

In step S411, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed according to the content of the operation navigation determined in step S410. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C). Further, in step S411, preparations are made for transmitting a push order command including the operation content (push order information) of the operation navigation to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 execute the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 based on the contents of the received push order commands (FIG. 9 (b) (c)). After the end of step S411, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S412, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning combination internal lottery in the game is a loss. If the result of the winning combination internal lottery is lost in the game, the process proceeds to step S413, and if not, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S413, an operation navigation execution lottery is performed. The operation navigation execution lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the operation navigation. Specifically, the winning probability of the operation navigation execution lottery when the result of the winning combination internal lottery is lost is 1/8.

In step S414, if the result of the operation navigation execution lottery in step S413 is won, the process proceeds to step S415, and if not, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S415, the push order lottery is executed to determine the operation content of the correct answer, and the determined operation content of the correct answer is set as the content of the operation navigation. For details, operate one of the six choices of "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right middle left", and "right middle left". The contents of.

In step S416, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed according to the content of the operation navigation determined in step S415. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C). Further, in step S416, preparations are made for transmitting a push order command including the operation content (push order information) of the operation navigation to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 execute the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 based on the contents of the received push order commands (FIG. 9).

In this way, in the game in which the small winning combination 3a is internally won, the forward pressing operation navigation of "left, middle, and right" may be executed, or the internal winning game of the replay combination 1 (normal replay) may be executed. In some cases, the operation navigation may not be executed, and even if the operation navigation is lost, the operation navigation may be executed. As a result, the player does not know the winning result until the stop operation is completed in the game with the operation navigation in the AT state and the game without the operation navigation, and the player can improve the motivation to play without making the stop operation monotonous. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. However, in the game, an effect suggesting that the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) has been internally won (hereinafter referred to as a small winning combination 3 winning suggestion effect) may be executed.

FIG. 21A shows an example of an effect when the small winning combination 3 winning suggestion effect is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. In the small winning combination 3 winning suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21 (a), an image suggesting small winning combination 3 winning (hereinafter referred to as a small winning combination 3 winning suggestion image; for example, a bell displayed on the periphery of the screen) when the start lever is operated. (Yellow image frame suggesting winning, etc.) d20 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By visually recognizing the small winning combination 3 winning suggestion image d20, the player knows that the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) has been won, so that the normal stop operation of "left middle right" is performed. Expected to do. FIG. 21A shows a display mode and an effect mode of the reel after the third stop operation when the player pushes the “left, middle, right” forward. In this case, the small winning combination 3 winning image d30 indicating the small winning combination 3 winning is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 21B shows another production example when the small winning combination 3 winning suggestion effect is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. The small winning combination 3 winning suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21B is an effect of vibrating the shutters 163a and 163b to the left and right when the start lever is operated. In this way, the small role 3 winning suggestion effect does not have to be an image effect. Since the player recognizes that the attention is being alerted by the vibration of the shutters 163a and 163b, he / she understands that the operation should be performed carefully (that is, it is better not to perform the operation other than the forward pressing). It is expected that the normal stop operation of "left, middle, right" will be executed. This is because if the normal stop operation of "left, middle, right" is not executed on the conventional game console, the reel pull-in control according to the order is executed, resulting in an unintended dropout. Because there was. FIG. 21B shows the display mode and the effect mode of the reel after the third stop operation when the player pushes the "left middle right" forward, and the small winning combination 3 winning image d30 is produced. It is displayed on the image display device 157.

In addition, the small role 3 (pushing order bell) of the above embodiment is one of the six choices of "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right left middle", and "right middle left". Was decided as the correct operation order. However, one of the subdivided small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) may set the correct answer only for the first stop operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is subdivided into five small winning combination 3ax, small winning combination 3bx, small winning combination 3cx, small winning combination 3dx, and small winning combination 3ex, and the correct answer of the small winning combination 3ax. There may be two stop operations, "left middle right" and "left and right middle". That is, when the small winning combination 3ax is internally won, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) may be won by performing the first stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110. In this case, the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3ax in the AT state is internally won, and the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3bx to the small winning combination 3ex in the AT state is internally won. .. In the game in which the small winning combination 3ax in the AT state is internally won, the player has a high probability of performing the first stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 even if there is no operation navigation. There is a high probability of winning a prize. The internal winning probabilities of these five roles are the same.

In FIG. 23 (a), in the game in which the small winning combination 2 (cherry) or the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation is not executed, but the effect a that gives the player a sense of expectation is executed. It is a time chart of a modification example when there is a case. Here, the small role 2 (cherry) is a role that may be given a predetermined profit such as an addition of an AT game or a simultaneous internal winning with a special role (bonus) when the role is internally won. .. That is, the production a is a production in which an additional AT game and an internal winning of a special role (bonus) can be expected. It should be noted that the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) is a winning combination that is unlikely to be given a predetermined profit such as an addition of an AT game or a simultaneous internal winning with a special winning combination (bonus).

FIG. 23B shows an example of the display mode of the effect a. In the effect a, for example, an image showing an expectation (hereinafter referred to as an expectation image; for example, characters such as “extreme heat”) d40 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By seeing the expectation image d40 of the effect a, the player expects the AT game to be added and improves the expectation.

However, conventionally, in a game in which such an expectation image d40 is displayed, if the small role 2 cannot be won, the player is disappointed and the interest of the game is lowered.

Therefore, in this modification, the effect a is executed even in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, and the expected feeling image d40 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. As a result, even if the player who visually recognizes the effect a does not win the small winning combination 2 without stopping the cherry symbol on the effective line when the middle reel 111 is stopped for the first time, the bell is on the effective line. If the symbol is stopped, it can be expected that there is a possibility of winning the small winning combination 3a as a result of the subsequent stop, so that the expectation can be maintained without being discouraged.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 23A, the effect a may be executed even when the winning combination internal lottery process in the AT state is lost. In this way, even in the case of loss, the effect a may or may not be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23A, the effect a may not be executed in the game in which the small winning combination 2 (cherry) or the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won. As described above, in this modified example, the execution lottery is performed in the game in which the small winning combination 2 (cherry) or the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won, and the effect a is executed only when the winning combination is won. ing. However, apart from this, the effect a may always be executed in the game in which the small winning combination 2 (cherry) or the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won.

Further, in this modification, the small winning combination 3a is set as a combination that is not given a predetermined profit such as an addition of an AT game, but is set as a combination that may be given a predetermined benefit such as an addition of an AT game. May be good. By winning a small role 3a (Oshijun Bell), the player's expectation may be further improved. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small winning combination 2 (the probability of granting the predetermined profit is smaller than that of the cherry, or the magnitude of the profit is smaller.

Although the effect a is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 2 in the AT state is internally won and the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, the same effect a may not be executed. Any production of the same series may be used. For example, the effect a1 in which characters such as "super heat" are displayed but the background color is blue to indicate that the expectation is low, and the characters such as "super heat" are displayed but the background color is high in expectation. An effect a2 to be represented in red is prepared, and the effect a2 is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 2 in the AT state is internally won, and the effect a1 is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. Since there is no additional AT game (or the probability that there is an additional AT game is low) in the game in which the small role 3a is internally won, the production a1 may perform a production indicating that the expectation is lower than that of the production a2. preferable. As described above, the effect a may have the same characters in some parts or different characters in other parts.

[Second Embodiment]
In the second embodiment, not only the game in which the small winning combination 3 in the AT state (pushing order bell; except for the small winning combination 3a) or the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won, but also the small winning combination 4 in the unquestioned push order. The operation navigation is also executed in the game in which the (common bell) is internally won. Then, in the operation navigation in the game in which the replay role 1 (normal replay) or the small role 4 (common bell) of the unquestioned push order is internally won, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is not executed, and the first sub control unit is used. Only the operation navigation by the 400 / second sub-control unit 500 is executed. This is from the viewpoint of reducing the processing load of the main control unit 300. Since the push order unquestioned combination always wins a prize regardless of the order of the stop operation, the operation navigation is less important than the push order combination. Therefore, it was decided to reduce the processing load of the main control unit 300 by using only the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

In addition, in the game in which the push order unquestioned combination in the AT state is internally won, when the configuration in which the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is not executed is adopted, the operation is performed if there is only one push order unquestioned combination that is the target of the operation navigation. Since the internal winning combination is grasped by the player from the notification mode of the navigation, in the second embodiment, the operation navigation is executed even in the game in which the small combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won.

For example, if the winning probabilities of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) differ between settings 1 to 6, and if the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in the AT state, the operation navigation is executed unless the operation navigation is executed. It turns out that the internal winning combination was small role 4 (common bell) when the bell was won. The set value can be estimated by counting the frequency. Further, for example, when a lottery is performed by adding the number of games in the AT state when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, the operation navigation must be executed when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in the AT state. When the operation navigation is not executed and the bell is won, it turns out that the internal winning combination was the small combination 4 (common bell). It is expected that the number of games in the AT state will be added each time, but if there is no actual addition, the motivation for playing will be reduced.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, even if the operation navigation is executed only by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, the internal winning combination is not exposed to the player.

In the second embodiment, only the configurations, functions, and processes different from those in the first embodiment will be described, and the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals with respect to other configurations, functions, and processes, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining whether or not the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the non-AT state and the AT state is internally won.

As shown in FIG. 24, the slot machine 100 does not execute the operation navigation in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the non-AT state is internally won, and the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won. In the game, the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 is executed without executing the operation navigation by the main control unit 300.

In the game in which the AT state replay combination 1 (normal replay) or small combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, the notification content of the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is the first. 1 Determined by the sub-control unit 400. That is, when the main control unit 300 transmits an internal winning command indicating the internal winning of the replay combination 1 (normal replay) or the small combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state, the first sub control unit 400 replays. The push order lottery is executed when the internal winning command indicating the internal winning of the game combination 1 (normal replay) or the small combination 4 (common bell) is received, and the notification content of the operation navigation is determined.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is always executed. However, apart from this, in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won, an execution lottery is performed, and only when the winning is won, the operation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is performed. You may try to execute the navigation.

FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the execution status of the operation navigation in the AT state of the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 26A is a diagram showing a notification mode of the operation navigation of the game in which the small winning combination 3a, the small winning combination 4, or the replaying combination 1 is internally won in the AT state.

As shown in FIG. 25, the slot machine 100 provides operation navigation by the main control unit 300 in (1) a game in which the AT state replay combination 1 (normal replay) or small combination 4 (common bell) is internally won. In the game in which the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is executed without being executed, and (2) the small winning combination 3 of any of the small winning combination 3b to 3f in the AT state is internally won, the main The operation navigation is executed by the control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500, and (3) the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. -Neither of the second sub-control units 500 executes the operation navigation.

In the second embodiment as well, as in the modified example of the first embodiment, an execution lottery may be performed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a is internally won, and if the game is won, the operation navigation may be executed. (See steps S402 to S406 in FIG. 20).

FIG. 26 (b) is a diagram showing a change in the notification mode of the operation navigation in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won, and FIG. 26 (c) is a diagram showing the change in the notification mode of the operation navigation in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state is shown. It is a figure which shows the change of the notification mode of the operation navigation in the game which won (normal replay) internally.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26 (b) and 26 (c), the notification mode of the operation navigation for the unquestioned push order combination is the same. This is to prevent the player from grasping the result of the winning combination internal lottery process. Specifically, in the game in which the small role 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation image d10 displayed on the effect image display device 157 is an image in black characters instead of yellow that recognizes the bell. Is. Further, in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation image d10 displayed on the effect image display device 157 is an image in black characters instead of light blue for recognizing the replay. .. In this way, when the internal winning combination is internally won in the AT state, the display mode of the operation navigation image d10 is the same so that the internal winning combination is not grasped.

[Third Embodiment]
The symbol combination of the replay combination 1 (normal replay) of the third embodiment is different from the symbol combination of the replay combination 1 (normal replay) of the first embodiment. FIG. 27A is a diagram showing a symbol combination of the special combination 1, the special combination 2, and the replay combination 1 of the third embodiment. The only symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 (BB) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1 (BB1)", and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role 1 (normal replay) is "Seven 2-Seven". 2-Seven 2 "and" Replay-Replay-Replay ". The other types of winning combinations and symbol combinations are the same as those in the first embodiment. In the third embodiment, only the configurations, functions, and processes different from those of the first embodiment will be described, and the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals with respect to other configurations, functions, and processes, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The re-game combination 1 (normal replay) of the present embodiment is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process, and (1) when the reverse push stop operation of "right, middle, left" is performed, it is on the effective line. When the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" is displayed in, and (2) a stop operation other than the reverse press of "Right, Middle, Left" is performed, "Replay-Replay-Replay" is displayed on the effective line. The symbol combination of is displayed. The replay combination 1 of (1) is referred to as a replay combination 1 of the bonus symbol, and the replay combination 1 of (2) is referred to as a replay combination 1 of the replay symbol.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27B, when the AT start condition is satisfied, only the first sub control unit 400 is in the AT state first, and the main control unit 300 has the AT start condition. The AT state is set from the next game of the game in which the replay role 1 (normal replay) is internally won after the establishment. FIG. 27B is a diagram showing the transition of the game state of the AT system of the third embodiment, the notification mode of the expectation effect, and the execution status of the operation navigation.

In the third embodiment, in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) after the AT start condition is satisfied is internally won, the expectation effect including the content of the stop operation is executed. The expectation effect is an effect that expects a predetermined privilege to be given, and in the present embodiment, it is an effect that expects a transition to the AT state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the expectation effect is the operation navigation image d10 and the Seven 2 symbol showing the operation sequence from the first stop operation to the third stop operation, as in the operation navigation. This is an effect of displaying the image d50 instructing to aim and outputting the sound indicating the operation order via the speakers 272 and 277 to encourage the winning of the replaying combination 1 of the bonus symbol. That is, the expectation effect is an effect including the notification content of the operation navigation. The content of the notification of the expectation effect of the present embodiment is information indicating the stop operation order of the reverse pressing of "right, middle, left". The player expects the transition to the AT state by viewing the effect images d10 and d50 of the expectation effect and listening to the sound of the expectation effect.

In addition, in the game in which the expectation effect is executed, even if the bonus symbol replay role 1 is won or not, the bonus symbol replay role 1 is not won (the replay symbol replay role 1 is won). However, from the next game of the game in which the expectation effect is executed, the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 becomes the AT state. Assuming such playability, the re-game combination 1 of the AT state ( In a game that is internally won in (normal replay), if you execute the operation navigation of the reverse push operation order of "right, middle, left", the bonus symbol replay role 1 will be displayed, so the player misunderstands. It may improve expectations. Therefore, in the third embodiment, in the game in which the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation of the reverse push operation order of "right, middle, left" is not executed.

FIG. 28A is a table schematically showing the contents of the push order lottery table used in the push order lottery of the game internally won in the AT state replay combination 1 (normal replay). As shown in FIG. 28 (a), in the push order lottery of the game in which the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the reverse push of "right, middle, left" is not selected. Then, in order to avoid the reverse push of "right middle left", the probability that the forward push of "left middle right" is selected is set high. Therefore, if the game is limited to the game in which the AT state replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won, the execution probability of the forward push operation navigation of "left, middle, right" is high.

In the third embodiment, in view of this point, it is decided not to execute the forward push operation navigation of "left middle right" in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won. This is to reduce the execution frequency of the forward pressing operation navigation of "left, middle, right" as the entire AT state.

In the third embodiment, the operation navigation is executed even in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won. That is, in the AT state of the third embodiment, in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell: excluding the small winning combination 3a), the small winning combination 4 (common bell), or the replay winning combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. The operation navigation by the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 is executed. Then, the forward push operation navigation of "left, middle, right" can be executed in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) or the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won.

FIG. 28B is a time chart showing the expectation effect and the execution status of the operation navigation in the AT state. In summary, the slot machine 100 executes the expectation effect in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won after the AT start condition is satisfied. Also, in the AT state, the operation navigation is used in the game in which the replay role 1 (normal replay) or the small role 3 (pushing order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell) of any of the small roles 3b to 3f is internally won. It is executed, and the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small role 3a is internally won.

Therefore, the forward push operation navigation of "left, middle, right" is not executed in the game in which the small role 3a is internally won, and is executed in the game in which the replay role 1 (normal replay) is internally won. Does not give a small impression. In the past, there was a player who remembered the contents of the operation navigation that is frequently executed in the AT state and operated the contents in the normal game state, but it must give the impression that the forward push operation navigation is not executed frequently. For example, the effect of prompting the forward push operation in the normal gaming state may be expected as a result.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment is similar to the third embodiment. The operating conditions for winning the re-gaming combination 1 of the bonus symbol are different, and the game performance other than that is substantially the same as that of the third embodiment. That is, the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) include "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" and "Replay-Replay-Replay" as in the third embodiment. The re-game combination 1 is internally elected to the winning combination in the internal lottery process of the winning combination, and (1) when the forward push stop operation of "left middle right" is performed, "Seven 2-Seven 2-" is placed on the valid line. The symbol combination of "Seven 2" is displayed, and (2) when a stop operation other than the forward pressing of "left, middle, right" is performed, the symbol combination of "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the effective line.

FIG. 29A is a time chart showing the transition of the game state of the AT system of the fourth embodiment, the notification mode of the expectation effect, and the execution / non-execution of the operation navigation. The slot machine 100 executes an expectation effect in a game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) after the AT start condition is satisfied is internally won. The expectation effect is an effect that expects a predetermined privilege to be given, and also in the present embodiment, it is an effect that expects a transition to the AT state. Specifically, the expectation effect is displayed via the operation navigation image d10 showing the stop operation order of the forward pressing of "left middle right", the image d50 instructing to aim at the Seven 2 symbol, and through the speakers 272 and 277. This is a production that outputs a voice indicating the operation order of "left, middle, right" to encourage the winning of the replaying role 1 of the bonus symbol.

On the premise of such playability, in the game in which the AT state replay role 1 (normal replay) is internally won, when the operation navigation of the reverse push operation order of "left middle right" is executed, the bonus symbol is displayed. Since the re-game combination 1 is displayed, the player may misunderstand and improve the expectation. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, in the game in which the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation of the forward pressing operation order of "left middle right" is not executed.

FIG. 29B is a table schematically showing the contents of the push order lottery table used in the push order lottery of the game internally won in the AT state replay combination 1 (normal replay). As shown in FIG. 29 (b), in the push order lottery of the game in which the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the forward push of "left middle right" is not selected. Then, in order to avoid the forward push of "left middle right", the probability that the reverse push of "right middle left" is selected is set high.

In the fourth embodiment, in view of the fact that the forward push operation navigation of "left middle right" is not executed in the game in which the AT state replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won, the AT state small combination 3 In the game in which the (push order bell) was internally won, it was decided not to execute the forward push operation navigation of "left, middle, right". If, in a game in which the small role 3 (push order bell) in the AT state is internally won, the forward push operation navigation of "left middle right" is executed, the game is internally won in the small role 3 (push order bell). This is because the player will understand that.

Although not shown, in the AT state of the fourth embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) or the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) of any of the small winning combination 3b to 3f. , The operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, and the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a is internally won.

Therefore, if the operation navigation other than the forward push of "left, middle, right" is executed, there is a possibility of winning a small role 3a or a replay role 1 (normal replay), and either result until the game operation is completed. You can expect to be.

[Modifications in the first to fourth embodiments]
In the first to third embodiments described above, during the entire period of the AT state, the forward push operation navigation of "left, middle, right" was not executed when the small winning combination 3a was internally won. However, during a part of the AT state, the forward push operation navigation of "left middle right" at the time of winning the small winning combination 3a may be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 30A, from the start of the AT state to a predetermined number of games (for example, 500 games), the operation navigation at the time of winning the small winning combination 3a is executed, and the predetermined number of games is executed. After (for example, 500 games), the operation navigation at the time of winning the small winning combination 3a may not be executed. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 30B, until the difference number in the AT state is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets, etc.), the operation navigation at the time of winning the small winning combination 3a is executed, and the game in the AT state is executed. When the number exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 500 games), the operation navigation at the time of winning the small winning combination 3a may not be executed. Here, the difference number is a total count obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out.

For a player who has experienced the AT state for a long time and has become accustomed to the operation navigation, the operation navigation may not be executed or the frequency of the operation navigation may be reduced. It may be possible to reduce the fatigue of the player.

In addition, in principle, the forward push operation navigation of "left middle right" at the time of winning the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is not executed, and in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, the small winning combination 3 is continuously specified. If the number of times is not won, the forward push operation navigation of "left, middle, right" may be executed in the next game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won.

FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a situation of operation navigation in such a modified example. FIG. 31 shows that in the games G1, G2, and G3 that were internally won in the small role 3a in the AT state, the operation navigation was not executed and the small role 3 (pushing order bell) was not won (spilled eyes). Is displayed). Further, FIG. 31 shows that, as a result, in the game G4 in which the small winning combination 3a in the next AT state was internally won, the operation navigation was executed and the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) was won. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 31, if the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is not won three times in a row, the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won. It shows the case to do. The number of non-winnings of the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is not limited to three, and may be a total number of times in addition to the number of consecutive times.

In this way, based on the winning result of the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, it may be determined whether or not the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won next time.

In addition, the game state of the main control unit 300 may be changed according to the combination of spilled symbols displayed when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won. For example, (1) If any of the small wins 3b to 3f is internally won and the small win 3 (pushing order bell) is not won, the spilled eye A may be displayed, and (2) If the small winning combination 3a is internally won and the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is not won, the spilled eye B may be displayed.

Here, the spilled eye A is a symbol combination accompanied by a transition to a gaming state, and is a symbol combination accompanied by a transition to a disadvantageous gaming state. On the other hand, the spilled eye B is a symbol combination that does not involve a transition of the gaming state. That is, if the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the AT state and the small winning combination 3 is not won, it is difficult to shift to a disadvantageous gaming state, but in the AT state, the small winning combination 3b to 3f is internally won and the small winning combination is won. In the case of non-winning in 3, the transition to the disadvantageous gaming state may be facilitated.

FIG. 32 is a time chart showing the state of operation navigation in such a modified example. In the game in which the small role 3a in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation is not executed, so even if the small role 3 (pushing order bell) is not won, the spilled eye B is likely to be displayed (spilled eye). A is hard to display). On the other hand, therefore, in the game in which the small winning combination 3b to 3f in the AT state is internally won and the operation navigation is executed, if the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is not won, the spilled eye A is It is easier to display. Therefore, a game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won and the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is not won is internally won in any of the small winning combination 3b to 3f in the AT state, and the small winning combination 3 is used. Compared to the game that did not win the (Oshijun Bell), it is difficult to shift to a disadvantageous game state.

In the first to third embodiments, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) has a combination in which one of the so-called six choices is the correct operation order. For example, among the so-called three choices. One of the operation orders may serve as the correct operation order. Here, the three options mean, for example, a stop operation in which "the first stop operation is on the left", "the first stop operation is in the middle", and "the first stop operation is on the right". In this case, the correct answer operation of the small winning combination 3a is set to the stop operation in which the "first stop operation is left", and in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, the operation in which the "first stop operation is left" is set. Do not run navigation. In the past, there were many game consoles that recommended the operation of "forward push" of "left middle right" and "pinch hitting" of "left and right middle", so in the AT state, "forward push" (left middle). It is possible to prevent the loss from occurring when the stop operation of (right) or "pinching" (middle left and right) is performed.

In addition, when the recommended operation order is "forward push" of "left middle right" and "pinching" of "left and right middle", small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is so-called 5 choices (small winning combination 3a to small). The combination 3e), the stop operation order of the correct answer of the small combination 3a is "left middle right" and "left and right middle", the stop operation order of the correct answer of the small combination 3b is "middle left and right", and the stop operation order of the correct answer of the small combination 3c is stopped. The operation order is "middle right left", the stop operation order of the correct answer of the small winning combination 3d is "right left and right", and the stopping operation order of the correct answer of the small winning combination 3e is "right middle left". When the small winning combination 3a is internally won, it is difficult to cause a loss and the number of selections can be increased.

Furthermore, in the case of a game table in which the recommended operation order is "reverse push" of "right middle left", in the AT state, "reverse push" (right middle left) is the correct stop operation. If you win internally, you may not execute the operation navigation.

Further, conventionally, since there were many game consoles in which the first stop reel was set to the left reel 110 and the vicinity of the black BAR was operated to minimize the loss, the first stop reel was set to the left reel 110 and the vicinity of the black BAR in the AT state. If a winning combination that can be avoided by operating is internally won, the operation navigation may not be executed.

In addition, a plurality of types of replaying combinations are provided, and at least one of the plurality of types of replaying combinations can stop the "forward push" of "left middle right" in a specific gaming state. A game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state when the symbol combination that maintains a specific game state is stopped when the game is performed and a stop operation different from the "forward push" of "left, middle, right" is performed. It may be a transition re-game combination in which the symbol combination that shifts to is stopped. Then, in the AT state and the specific game state, the operation navigation may not be executed when the transition re-game combination is internally elected.

<< Embodiment of playability provided with a challenge zone >>
The fifth to sixth embodiments described below shift to the AT game instead of the embodiment that limits the operation navigation in the AT (assist time) game described in the first to fourth embodiments. This is an embodiment in which a new playability is realized by providing a state (challenge zone) that is easy to play.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, configurations, functions and processes different from those in the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals with respect to other configurations, functions and processes, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Types of winning roles>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination according to the fifth embodiment (this embodiment).

As shown in FIG. 33, the winning combination of the present embodiment does not have the replaying combination 2 (promotion replay) and the replaying combination 3 (demotion replay) (see FIG. 5), but the other winning combination is the first. It is the same as the embodiment. Further, the symbol combination and the number of grants of the roles shown in FIG. 33 (specifically, special role 1, special role 2, replaying role 1, small role 1, small role 2, small role 3, small role 4). And the contents of the combination are as described in the first embodiment.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is not a game table dedicated to three-card betting, but a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of medals inserted (number of bets) is set as an effective winning line. Specifically, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line will be added to the three medals. If 3 cards are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as winning lines.

<Type of game state>
FIG. 34 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly classified into a normal gaming state (RT1), a special winning combination internal winning state (RT2), and a special gaming state (RT3). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these three are referred to as RT-type gaming states. Further, the normal gaming state (RT1) is further subdivided into a normal state, an expected state (also referred to as a challenge zone, which may be abbreviated as CZ below), and an AT state. This subdivided gaming state of the normal gaming state (RT1) is called an AT-based gaming state. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls the state related to the so-called AT (assist time), and the first sub-control is performed according to the RT system game state and the AT system game state determined by the main control unit 300. The unit 400 is designed to set the effect game state.

Hereinafter, the transition of the game state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate. The definitions of the normal gaming state (RT1), the special winning combination internal winning state (RT2), and the special gaming state (RT3) are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The normal gaming state (RT1) is set in the initial state, and when the number of medals is paid out in excess of the specified number in the special gaming state (RT3) (details will be described later), the normal gaming state (RT1) is set. .. The normal gaming state (RT1) set in the initial state and the normal gaming state (RT1) set when transitioning from the special gaming state (RT3) are normal states. In addition, in the normal game state (RT1), when the special role is internally won, the state shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT2), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed on the valid line (special). If you win a role), you will be in a special game state (RT3).

The special role internal winning state (RT2) is set when the special role is internally won in the normal game state. On the other hand, in the special combination internal winning state (RT2), when the symbol combination corresponding to the internally winning special combination is displayed, the process shifts to the special gaming state (RT3).

The special gaming state (RT3) is set when a special winning combination is won in the normal gaming state (RT1) or the special winning combination internal winning state (RT2). On the other hand, in the special game state (RT3), when the specified number of sheets is paid out, the state shifts to the normal state of the normal game state (RT1). Specifically, when the system shifts to the special gaming state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, it shifts to the normal state when the payout of more than 300 medals is completed. Further, when the state shifts to the special game state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state shifts to the normal state when the payout of more than 100 medals is completed.

Next, the game state of the AT system of the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

The normal state and the expected state are game states in which the operation navigation is not executed. The normal state and the expected state are states in which the number of medals paid out <the number of medals inserted throughout the period, and the number of medals of the player is reduced. On the other hand, the AT state is a game state in which the operation navigation is executed. The AT state is a state in which the number of medals paid out> the number of medals inserted throughout the period, and the number of medals of the player increases. In the AT-type gaming state, the AT state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

Further, the normal state and the expected state are gaming states that can be shifted to the AT state when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The expected state is easier to shift to the AT state than the normal state. That is, the expected state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

As described above, there is a difference between the normal state and the expected state in that the expected state is more likely to shift to the AT state than the normal state. Further, there is a difference between the normal state and the expected state in that the effect of expecting the expected state to shift from the normal state to the AT state is easily executed. That is, in the expected state, the effect of expecting the transition to the AT state is executed frequently (every game is executed), but in the normal state, the effect of expecting the transition to the AT state is executed frequently. Low.

The expected state may be a gaming state in which the operation navigation is executed. At this time, it is preferable to set the game state in which the operation navigation is executed at a lower frequency than the AT state (the operation navigation is executed in some games among the games internally won by the push order bell).

Here, the operation navigation of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the game state of the AT system is the AT state, and the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won, more specifically, the small winning combination 3a When any of the small winning combination 3f is internally won, the operation navigation indicating the correct operation order is executed.

FIG. 35A is a diagram illustrating a privilege period of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the game is characterized in that the AT state and the expected state are alternately continuous, and the period composed of the AT state and the expected state is referred to as a privilege period. The started privilege period ends when the limiter is reached, and the AT system game state (for example, AT state or expected state) at the time when the limiter is reached shifts to the normal state. Reaching the limiter in this embodiment is basically the digestion of 1000 games during the privilege period. That is, if 1000 games are consumed in the privilege period, the privilege period ends.

In addition, other conditions may be set as the conditions for reaching the limiter, and other conditions are set (multiple types of conditions are set) in addition to the conditions for digesting 1000 games, and any of the conditions is satisfied. The case may be a condition for reaching the limiter.

In this embodiment, the navigation generation status notification lamp 190 can be turned on during this privilege period. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when the AT game number correction process is executed for the last AT state, the privilege period ends even if the number of games in the privilege period does not reach 1000 games. There is.

FIG. 35B is a table showing the transition of the game state of the AT system of the present embodiment.

First, the transition from the normal state to another state will be described. In the normal state, if the player wins the transition lottery 1 that determines whether or not to shift to the expected state, which is executed every game, the game shifts to the expected state. Further, in the normal state, when the player wins the transition lottery 2 for determining whether or not to shift to the AT state, which is executed every game, the game shifts to the AT state. Here, the winning probability of the transition lottery 1 is set higher than the winning probability of the transition lottery 2. For example, the winning probability of the transition lottery 1 is 1/100, and the winning probability of the transition lottery 2 is 1/500. Therefore, in the normal state, it is easier to shift to the expected state than to shift to the AT state.

Next, the transition from the expected state to another state will be described. In the expected state, when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the game shifts to the normal state. Here, the predetermined number of games means the number of games set when the transition lottery 1 is won. Specifically, when the transition lottery 1 is won, the expected number of games lottery is performed, and as shown in FIG. 35 (c), one of 10, 20 or 30 is set as the number of games. For example, when the transition lottery 1 is won and 10 is set by the expected number of games lottery, when 10 games are exhausted in the expected state, the expected state is terminated and the normal state is entered. In addition, when the limiter of the privilege period is reached in the expected state, the expected state is terminated and the normal state is entered.

When the limiter is reached in the expected state, the player's expectation may be lowered. Therefore, when the number of games remaining until the limiter is reached is small, the normal state may be set without setting the expected state. For example, when setting the expected state, the number of games until the limiter is reached is determined, and if the number of games is less than 30 games, the normal state may be set without setting the expected state.

If the AT transition lottery is won in the expected state, the AT transition state is entered. As will be described in detail later, the AT transition lottery includes the AT transition lottery 1 executed in the first game in the expected state and the AT transition lottery 2 executed in each game in the expected state (excluding the first game). And there is. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the expected state, when the AT transition lottery is won, the expected state is interrupted and the game immediately shifts to the AT state, and the predetermined number of games in the expected state is exhausted. There are cases where the state shifts to the AT state later.

Next, the transition from the AT state to another state will be described. When the limiter of the privilege period is reached in the AT state, the AT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, in the AT state, when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the game shifts to the expected state. Here, the predetermined number of games means the number of games set when the transition lottery 2 or the AT transition lottery is won. Specifically, when the transition lottery 2 or the AT transition lottery is won, the AT game number lottery is performed, and as shown in FIG. 35 (c), the number of games is 10, 20, 30, 33, 50, 55 or 70. One of them is set. In the present embodiment, in the AT game number lottery for the first AT state of the privilege period, 10 is set as the number of games, and 33 and 77 are the numbers of games suggesting the set value. .. For example, when there are settings "1" to "6" as setting values, 33 and 77 are easily selected when settings "4" to "6" are set. Hereinafter, as the number of games in the AT state, 10, 20, 30, 50 and 70 are referred to as normal numbers, and 33 and 55 are referred to as set suggestion numbers.

In the present embodiment, the condition for shifting from the expected state to the normal state is the number of digested games in the expected state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of losses, the number of times the re-game combination 1 is won, and the like may be set, and in the expected game number lottery, a plurality of options may be provided for the number of losses, the number of times the re-game combination 1 is won, and the like. Even in this case, a plurality of types of expected states having different periods can be provided. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the condition for shifting from the AT state to the expected state is the number of digested games in the AT state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of operation navigations and the number of medals won for the small role 3 (pushing bell), which is the push order role, are used. A plurality of options may be provided. Even in this case, a plurality of AT states having different profitability can be provided.

Further, the transition conditions in the AT system gaming state shown in FIG. 35 (b) may be the same conditions regardless of the set values (settings 1 to 6), or may be different for each set value.

FIG. 36A is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents of the AT game number lottery in detail. In the AT game number lottery, first, one game number is selected from 10, 20, 30, 50, or 70, and then, when the selected game number is 50 or 70, a lottery is further executed. For example, when the number of selected games is 30, the 33-selection lottery is executed, and when the 33-selection lottery is won, 33 is set as the number of games. On the other hand, when the number of selected games is 50, the 55 selection lottery is executed, and when the 55 selection lottery is won, 55 is set as the number of games.

In this first lottery, when the number of selected games is 10, 20 or 30, or when the number of selected games is 50 or 70, it is not included in the second lottery (33 selection lottery, 55 selection lottery). If the game is won, the number of selected games is set as the number of games in the AT state.

In the case of the AT game number lottery for the first AT state in the privilege period, 10 is set as the number of games in the AT state. If the specifications are such that a large number of 10, 20, 30, 50, and 70 are selected for the initial AT state, there is a possibility that the frequency of continuous (additional) AT states cannot be increased, and the AT state starts. This is because the probability may be low. Further, in the case of the AT game number lottery for the last AT state (detailed later) in the privilege period, the 33 selection lottery and the 55 selection lottery are not performed. That is, in the AT game number lottery for the final AT state, first, one game number is selected from 10, 20, 30, 50, or 70. This is to execute the AT game number correction process (details will be described later) in the final AT state.

FIG. 36B is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents of the 33 selection lottery. In the 33-selection lottery of the present embodiment, the winning probability differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the set value is set 1, 3 or 5, the winning probability of the 33 selection lottery is 30%, and when the set value is set 2, 4 or 6, the winning probability of the 33 selection lottery is It is 70%. That is, when 33 is set as the number of games in the AT state, it can be estimated that there is a high probability that the set value is an even number. In other words, it can be said that the number of games 33 in the AT state is a number capable of determining whether the set value is odd or even.

FIG. 36 (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents of the 55 selection lottery. 55 It is a schematic diagram explaining the content of a selection lottery. In the 55 selection lottery of the present embodiment, the winning probability is different depending on the set value. Specifically, when the set value is set 1, 2 or 3, the winning probability of the 55 selection lottery is 30%, and when the set value is set 4, 5 or 6, the winning probability of the 55 selection lottery is It is 70%. That is, when 55 is set as the number of games in the AT state, it can be estimated that the set value has a high probability of being set high. In other words, it can be said that the number of games 55 in the AT state is a number capable of determining whether the set value is a high setting or a low setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of games 33 and 55 in the AT state is a set suggestion number that suggests a set value. The setting suggestion number 55 is a numerical value that gives more advantageous information to the player than the setting suggestion number 33.

37 (a) and 37 (b) are diagrams illustrating another example of the privilege period. As shown in FIG. 35A, it is assumed that the privilege period is recognized as a series of periods when the AT state and the expected state are alternately and repeatedly repeated. However, as shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), there are cases where the process ends only in the AT state and the expected state, and there are cases where the process ends only in the expected state.

FIG. 37 (c) is a diagram showing a counting period c1 for counting the number of games in the privilege period. In the case of the present embodiment, the privilege period counter counts the number of games from the start of the privilege period, and when the value of the privilege period counter reaches 1000, the privilege period ends.

FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating the number of games in the AT state for the first time and the number of games in the AT state for the second and subsequent times during the privilege period.

FIG. 38A is a diagram illustrating the number of games in the first AT state and the number of games in the expected state after the end of the first AT state during the privilege period. Specifically, FIG. 38A shows the case where the number of games in the AT state for the first time is 10 and the number of games in the expected state thereafter is 10.

In the present embodiment, as described above, 10 games are set as the initial AT state in the privilege period. Then, when the first AT state ends after digesting 10 games of the specified number of games, the number of games in the expected state started after the first AT state is 10, based on the result of the expected number of games lottery. It is selected from 20 or 30 (see FIG. 35 (c)), but the probability that a short number of games, specifically 10, is selected is high. As a result, in the present embodiment, when the AT state for a short period is set in the privilege period, there is a high probability that the expected state for a short period is set. Since the first AT state is a short period, the number of medals obtained in the first AT state is not so large. Therefore, if the period of the expected state started after the first AT state is shortened and the number of medals lost in the expected state is reduced, the possibility that the player buys additional medals in the middle can be reduced.

It should be noted that the initial AT state may not be fixedly set to 10 games as in the present embodiment, but a short number of games may be set. For example, the number of games may be selected from 10, 20 or 30. Further, instead of increasing the probability that a short number of games is set with respect to the expected state after the first AT state, 10 games may be fixedly set.

Further, when the AT state is 10 games, 10 may be always selected as the period of the expected state. Further, when the AT state is 20 games, a number (10 or 20) of 20 games or less may be selected as the period of the expected state.

FIG. 38B is a diagram illustrating the number of games in the AT state after the second time in the privilege period and the number of games in the expected state after the AT state of the second transition is completed. Specifically, FIG. 38A shows the case where the number of games in the second AT state is 20 and the number of games in the expected state thereafter is 20.

In the present embodiment, the number of games other than 10 is set for the second and subsequent AT states in the privilege period. Specifically, the number of AT games is drawn, and the number of games is selected from 20, 30, 33, 50, 55 or 70. That is, since the second and subsequent AT states have a longer period than the first AT state, the number of medals that can be obtained in the second and subsequent AT states is larger than that in the first AT state. Then, when the second and subsequent AT states have exhausted the specified number of games and ended, the number of games in the expected state started after the second and subsequent AT states is 20 or 30 games by the expected number of games lottery. It is selected from. As a result, in the present embodiment, when the AT state for a long period is set in the privilege period, there is a high probability that the expected state for a long period is set. Since the AT state after the second time is a long period, the number of medals obtained in the AT state after the second time is large. Therefore, the period of the expected state that starts after the second and subsequent AT states is lengthened, and even if the number of medals lost in the expected state is increased, the possibility that the player buys additional medals in the middle can be reduced. ..

It should be noted that the number of games may be selected from 10, 20, 30, 33, 50, 55 or 70 for the second and subsequent AT states in the privilege period. In this case, since the probability that 10 is selected in the second and subsequent AT states is low, the probability that the number of medals that can be obtained in the second and subsequent AT states is high is high.

In addition, although FIG. 38 has described the case of shifting from the normal state to the AT state, the same applies to the case of shifting from the normal state to the AT state via the expected state. As the first AT state in the privilege period, the AT state after passing through the expected state may be set as the first AT state in the privilege period.

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating in detail the AT transition lottery executed in the expected state. As described above, the AT transition lottery includes the AT transition lottery 1 executed in the first game in the expected state, the AT transition lottery 2 executed in each game in the expected state (excluding the first game), and the AT transition lottery 2. There is.

FIG. 39A is a table showing an example of the winning probability of the AT transition lottery. According to FIG. 39 (a), the winning probability of the AT transition lottery 1 is 1/6, and the winning probability of the AT transition lottery 2 is 1/50. This numerical value is much larger than the winning probability of the transition lottery 2 executed in the normal state. From this numerical value, it can be said that the expected state is a gaming state in which the transition to the AT state is easier than in the normal state.

FIG. 39B is a diagram showing the execution time of the AT transition lottery. As described above, the AT transition lottery 1 is executed in the first game that has transitioned to the expected state, and the AT transition lottery 2 is executed in each game (excluding the first game) in the expected state. The AT transition lottery 1 and the AT transition lottery 2 are executed at the start of the game, that is, at the time of operating the start lever.

FIG. 39C is a diagram illustrating the number of stocks in the AT state. In the present embodiment, the right to shift to the AT state can be stocked, and a numerical value from 0 to 255 can be stored in the memory as the number of stocks. When the number of stocks is 1 or more, it is confirmed that the state shifts to the AT state after the expected state ends. That is, when the number of stocks is 1 or more, the next AT state is fixed.

FIG. 39D is a diagram showing an example of the winning probability of the expected state end lottery. According to FIG. 39 (d), the winning probability of the expected state end lottery is 1/2. In the present embodiment, when the player wins the AT transition lottery 2, the expected state end lottery is further executed, and it is determined whether or not the expected state is interrupted and the AT state is immediately started. If the expected state end lottery is won, the expected state is interrupted and the AT state is started immediately. If the expected state end lottery is not won, the expected state is continued and the specified number of games is exhausted. After that, the AT state is started. Since the expected state is the number of medals paid out <the number of medals inserted throughout the period, it is advantageous for the player to immediately start the AT state. In the expected state after the second AT state, the expected state end lottery is performed, and in the expected state after the first AT state, the expected state end lottery is not performed.

FIG. 39 (e) is a diagram illustrating two transition patterns in the case of transition from the expected state to the AT state.

Case 1 is a transition pattern in which the player shifts to the AT state after exhausting all the predetermined number of games. Specifically, Case 1 shows a case where the AT transition lottery 2 is won in the 15th game in the expected state in which 30 games are determined as the specified number of games, and the lottery for ending the expected state is not won. .. In this case, since the AT transition lottery 2 was won, it is confirmed that the game will shift to the AT state, but since the lottery for the end of the expected state was not won, the AT state is started after 30 games have been completed in the expected state. To do.

On the other hand, Case 2 is a transition pattern in which a predetermined number of games is interrupted and the game immediately shifts to the AT state. Specifically, Case 2 shows a case where the AT transition lottery 2 is won in the 15th game in the expected state in which the number of games of 30 games is defined, and the lottery for ending the expected state is won. In this case, since the AT transition lottery 2 was won and the expected state end lottery was also won, the expected state is ended in the 15th game, and the AT state is started from the next game.

As described above, in the expected state of the present embodiment, there are two cases, one is to shift to the AT state after completing the predetermined number of games, and the other is to interrupt the predetermined number of games and shift to the immediate AT state. There are two patterns.

However, in the expected state of 10 games, the pattern of Case 2 does not exist. That is, in the expected state of 10 games, even if the AT transition lottery 2 is won and the expected state end lottery is also won, the pattern 1 is selected and the digestion of 10 games, which is the specified number of games, is required. This is because the expected state of 10 games is the expected state of the shortest period, so it is considered that the effect of reducing the number of medals is not so great even if the game is completed. In addition, it depends on the purpose of acquiring a large amount of stock in the AT state in the expected state.

In the present embodiment, the AT transition lottery is executed in the expected state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the AT transition lottery 2 may be executed in the AT state. Even in the AT state, the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing the transition time when shifting from the expected state to the AT state.

FIG. 40A is a timing chart when the AT transition lottery 1 is won and the transition to the AT state is determined. In this case, the number of stocks is 1 because the AT transition lottery 1 executed in the first game G1 in the expected state is won. After that, since the AT transition lottery 2 executed in the expected state was not won, the stock number is set to 0 after the specified number of games in the expected state is exhausted, and the AT state is started from the next game G2 of the game in which the expected state is completed. To start.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a), when the AT transition lottery 1 is won, the next AT state is already confirmed at the start of the expected state, so the production during the expected state should be sharpened. Is possible.

FIG. 40B is a timing chart when the AT transition lottery 2 is won, the expected state end lottery is not won, and the transition to the AT state is determined. In this case, the number of stocks is 1 because the AT transition lottery 1 executed in the first game G1 in the expected state is not won, and then the AT transition lottery 2 executed in the expected game G3 is won. However, since the lottery for ending the expected state was not won, the number of stocks is set to 0 after the specified number of games in the expected state is exhausted, and the AT state is started from the next game G2 of the game in which the expected state has ended.

FIG. 40 (c) is a timing chart when the AT transition lottery 2 is won and the expected state end lottery is won and the transition to the AT state is determined. In this case, the number of stocks is 1 because the AT transition lottery 1 executed in the first game G1 in the expected state is not won, and then the AT transition lottery 2 executed in the expected game G3 is won. Further, since the lottery for ending the expected state was also won, the expected state is ended in the game G3 in the expected state, the number of stocks is set to 0, and the AT state is started from the next game of the game G3.

As shown in FIG. 40 (c), when the expected state of the specified number of games is immediately terminated and the AT state is started, the disadvantageous state is terminated and the state shifts to the advantageous state. Therefore, from the viewpoint of winning medals. This is advantageous for the player, but it is disadvantageous for the player from the viewpoint of granting the right to the AT state because the privilege of the AT transition lottery 2 executed every game in the expected state for the remaining period cannot be received.

FIG. 41 is a graph showing the relationship between the privilege period and the number of medals acquired, and is a diagram for explaining the number of medals acquired in the playability in which the AT state and the expected state are alternately continuous. Here, the number of medals won is calculated by the sum of the number of medals paid out and the number of medals inserted in each game. Here, the inclination s1 indicates the theoretical ball ejection inclination in the privilege period, and the inclination s2 indicates the ball ejection inclination in the AT state.

FIG. 41 (a) shows that the number of medals won increases in the AT state and the number of medals won decreases in the expected state during the privilege period. In a short period of time (for example, only the first AT state), the slope s2> the slope s1, and the medals may increase beyond the theoretical ball ejection slope, but for a long period of time (for example, the AT state and the expected state) When viewed in a period (a period in which and is alternately continued a plurality of times), the ball ejection inclination of the entire privilege period becomes gentle and approaches the inclination s2. This is because a short-term expected state is set after a short-term AT state, and a long-term expected state is set after a long-term AT state.

FIG. 41 (b) shows this, and shows a case where the AT state and the expected state alternately end the privilege period five times in a row without shortening the expected state. In this way, if the race is completed without shortening the expected state, the chances of the AT transition lottery 2 increase, so that the probability of the next AT state occurring also increases. As a result, the probability that the AT state and the expected state are alternately repeated a plurality of times is high, and as a result, a long privilege period is formed, so that the medal output rate can be increased while approaching the inclination s1.

On the other hand, FIG. 41 (c) shows a case where the expected state is shortened and the AT state and the expected state alternately end the privilege period three times in a row. In this case, the number of medals won will increase in the short term, but the probability of the next AT state occurring will be low, so the continuity between the AT state and the expected state will be interrupted at a small number of times, and as a result, the privilege period Will end in a short period of time.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a series of long privilege periods can be realized by completing the expected state in which the AT transition lottery can be received, and the ball ejection inclination can be approached to the theoretical ball ejection inclination s1. .. On the other hand, if the expected state is shortened, the number of medals won can be increased in the short term.

<Direction of normal game state>
Next, the production of the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48.

-Expected state effect FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram for explaining the expected state and the normal state effect from the viewpoint of the presence or absence of the operation navigation. As described above, the expected state and the normal state are game states in which the operation navigation is not executed. This is because the expected state and the normal state are gaming states for the purpose of suppressing medal payout.

Specifically, FIG. 42A shows the production of the game in which the small winning combination 3b is internally won in each of the expected state and the normal state. FIG. 42A shows that the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the expected state and the normal state is internally won. Although not shown in FIG. 42 (a), the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won. However, since this effect mode is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted (see FIG. 9).

Further, FIG. 42A shows that the story effect is executed in the expected state, and the story display d110 is performed on the effect image display device 157. FIG. 42B shows an example of the story display d110. The story effect of the present embodiment is a continuous effect that is executed over a specified number of games in the expected state, and is an effect that is expected to shift to the AT state.

In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is not executed in the normal state and the expected state, but the operation navigation may be executed with a low probability. The normal state and the expected state can improve the motivation to play while setting the game state for the purpose of suppressing the payout of medals.

FIG. 43A is a table showing the types of story effects. The story effect of the present embodiment is composed of six types of effects, from story 1 to story 6. The story effect is set at the time of transition to the expected state.

The story 1 is a story effect set when the number of games in the expected state is 10 games, which is the minimum number of games. The story 1 is an effect suggesting that it is a short-term expected state after a short-term AT state. Therefore, the tension of the player may be increased in each game in the expected state.

The story 6 can be set when the AT state is fixed, and is a story effect indicating that the AT state is fixed (even if the AT state is fixed, another story effect is set. Sometimes). In the case of 10 games in which the expected number of games is the minimum number of games, the story 6 is not set even if the AT state is confirmed. That is, the story 6 is a story effect set when the period of the expected state is long. The player may feel bored if the period of the expected state in which the medals decrease is long, but the story effect of the story 6 can be executed to increase the motivation to play.

FIG. 43B is a timing chart showing an example of the story display d110 during the privilege period. Specifically, FIG. 43B shows the period of the expected state starting after the first AT state in the privilege period for 10 games, and the period of the expected state starting after the second AT state in the privilege period. An example of the story display in the case of 20 games is shown.

In this case, in the expected state of 10 games, the story display d110 of the story 1 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. This is because the story 1 is set when the number of games in the expected state is 10 games, which is the minimum number of games. By looking at the story display of the story 1, the player can grasp that the expected state ends in a short period of time.

Further, in the expected state of 20 games, the story display d110 of the story 6 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. This indicates that in the expected state of 20 games, the number of stocks is 1 at the start, and the next AT state is confirmed. By seeing the story display of the story 6, the player can proceed with the game with peace of mind because the period of the expected state becomes longer, but the next AT state is confirmed.

FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing an example of the story display d110 in the privilege period when the AT transition lottery is won in the expected state started with the stock number 1 and the stock number becomes 2.

FIG. 44A shows the case where the story effect started from the game G11 is the story 6, and the story effect started from the game G13 is the story 6.

Since the expected state starting from the game G11 is already the number of stocks 1 at the start time, the transition to the AT state is confirmed after the expected state ends. Therefore, the story 6 indicating the confirmation of the next AT state is selected. It shows the case where it was done. As a result, the player grasps that the AT state is started when the expected state started from the game G11 ends. Next, since the expected state started from the game G11 wins the AT transition lottery 2 and the expected state end lottery in the game G12, the expected state is interrupted and ended, and the AT state is started. As a result, the player can grasp that another AT state is confirmed in addition to the AT state starting from the next game of the game G12.

Since the expected state started from the game G13 has 1 stock at the start time, the transition to the AT state is confirmed after the expected state ends. Therefore, the case where the story 6 indicating the confirmation of the AT state next time is selected is shown. As a result, the player can reconfirm that the AT state is started when the expected state started from the game G13 ends.

FIG. 44B shows the case where the story effect started from the game G11 is story 3, and the story effect started from game G13 is story 6.

Since the expected state started from the game G11 has 1 stock at the start time, the transition to the AT state is confirmed after the expected state ends. However, it shows the case where the story 3 is selected as the story effect. In this case, the player cannot grasp whether or not the AT state is started even if the expected state started from the game G11 ends. Next, since the expected state started from the game G11 wins the AT transition lottery 2 and the expected state end lottery in the game G12, the expected state is interrupted and ended, and the AT state is started. As a result, the player can know that the game G12 has won the AT state transition lottery and the transition to the AT state has been decided.

Since the expected state started from the game G13 has 1 stock at the start time, the transition to the AT state is confirmed after the expected state ends. Therefore, the case where the story 6 indicating the confirmation of the AT state next time is selected is shown. As a result, the player can grasp that the AT state is started when the expected state started from the game G13 ends. Further, the player can confirm that the AT state is actually confirmed even in the expected state starting from the game G11.

In the present embodiment, the story effect is performed in the expected state, but the story effect may be performed in the AT state. In this case, the story effect may be a story effect that is continuous in a plurality of AT states. For example, the first episode of the story production is executed in the first AT game, the second episode of the story production is executed in the second AT game, and the third episode of the story production is executed in the third AT game. By continuing, the story production may be executed according to the number of times the AT game is executed. Then, when the final story of the story production is executed, the privilege period ends and the normal period starts with the AT game. According to this, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the privilege period.

-AT state effect FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of an AT game number notification effect d120 executed in the AT state.

The AT game number notification effect d120 is an effect of notifying the number of games and the number of remaining games during the entire AT state. In the AT game number notification effect d120, the effect image display device 157 displays the total number of games display d121 that displays the total number of games during the AT state, the remaining game number display d122 that displays the number of remaining games in the AT state, and the like. Further, in the AT game number notification effect d120, in addition to (1) the case where the total number of games display d121 is performed only in the first game in the AT state (hereinafter, referred to as the case where the total number of games is notified at one time), (2) ) There is a case where the total number of games display d121 is divided into a plurality of times including the first game (hereinafter, referred to as a case where the total number of games is notified by dividing into a plurality of times).

The number of notifications of the total number of games and the numerical value (number of games) of the total number of games display d121 when the total number of games is notified in a plurality of times are the notification patterns of the notification number table stored in advance in the memory. It is decided according to.

FIG. 46 shows an example of the notification number table. FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the notification number table. For example, when the period of the AT state is 70 games (normal number), as shown in FIG. 46 (a-2), a plurality of types of notification patterns are stored for 70 games and are determined by lottery. It is determined based on the number of notification patterns. The notification pattern shown in FIG. 45 (b) is the NO. It is 2 and is a pattern of notifying in two times. No. 46 (a-2). The notification pattern of 2 is a pattern in which 70 is divided into 20 and 50 for notification, and the number of games notified at the first time is 20 and the number of games notified at the second time is 70 (= 20 + 50).

Here, when the total number of games is displayed at one time in the AT game number notification effect d120, for example, when the period of the AT state is 70 games (normal number), 70 games are shown in the first game of the AT state. The total number of games is displayed d121. Further, when the period of the AT state is 55 games (setting suggested number), the total number of games display d121 indicating 55 games is performed in the first game of the AT state.

In the following, a case where the total number of games is notified in a plurality of times will be described. When the total number of games is displayed d121 in a plurality of times in the AT game number notification effect d120, the total number of games in the correct AT state period is notified in the final time, and the false AT state period other than the final time. The total number of games (the number smaller than the number of games in the AT state left at the time of notification) is notified. Further, when the numerical value indicating the period of the AT state is a normal number and the total number of games is notified in a plurality of times, the suggested number of settings is not notified in each notification of the total number of games. This is because if the normal number is notified after the set suggested number is notified, the player will be misunderstood.

FIG. 45 (a) is a timing chart relating to game progress when the period of the AT state is 70 games (normal number), and FIG. 45 (b) shows each game G21 to G26-shown in FIG. 45 (a). It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the AT game number notification effect d120 of E. The games G21 to G26-S shown in FIG. 45A indicate the start of the game, and G26-E indicates the end of the game.

The example shown in FIG. 45B shows a case where the total number of games is notified in two steps. Specifically, this is a case where 20 games are displayed on the first total number of games display d121 and 70 correct answers are displayed on the second total number of games display d121.

First, the slot machine 100 performs the first total number display d121 in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G21 that has started the AT state, and displays 20 games. As a result, the player grasps that the period of the AT state starting from now on is 20 games.

Next, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating 19 games in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G22, which is the second game in the AT state.

As the game progresses, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating one game in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G23, which is the 20th game in the AT state.

In the present embodiment, when the number of games indicated by the remaining game number display d122 is 3 or less, the number color of the remaining game number display d122 is a special color (for example, until then, the number was displayed in black). , As a special color, red, etc.), and the AT continuation suggestion effect that incites the continuation or termination of the AT state is executed. In the AT continuation suggestion effect, the AT continuation suggestion image d122S is displayed on the effect image display device 157. That is, the remaining game number display d122 in the game G23 is also the AT continuation suggestion display d122S. By seeing the AT continuation suggestion display d122S, the player expects that the AT state will continue, although the number of games remaining in the AT state based on the notification is several games.

The AT continuation suggestion display d122S of the present embodiment is an image display that changes the color of the number of the remaining game number display d122 to a conspicuous color, but the effect mode of the AT continuation suggestion effect is not limited to this. The AT continuation suggestion display d122S may be an image display that is executed over a plurality of games when the number of remaining games is equal to or less than the threshold value. For example, the number of characters appearing increases as the number of games in the AT state progresses. It may be used as a production image, or the size of the number of the remaining game number display d122 may be increased, and an effect display may be added around the number of the remaining game number display d122 to display the number of the remaining game number display d122. You may make noticeable changes.

Next, the slot machine 100 performs the second total number of games display d121 in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G24, which is the next game of the game G23 (21st game in the AT state), and displays a display indicating 70 games. Do. The second total number of games display d121 indicates the correct number of games during the entire period of the AT state. As a result, the player grasps that the AT state will continue in the future and that the first total number display d121 is an erroneous number. Further, since the slot machine 100 has 50 remaining games in the AT state, the remaining game number display d122 indicating 50 games is performed.

Next, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating 49 games in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G25, which is the 22nd game in the AT state.

As the game further progresses, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating one game in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G26-S, which is the 70th game in the AT state.

The remaining game number display d122 in the game G26 is not the AT continuation suggestion display d122S of a special color. That is, when 70 is displayed on the second total number of games display d121, the AT continuation suggestion display d122S is not performed even if the number of remaining games in the AT state based on the notification is equal to or less than the threshold value. This is because 70 shown in the second total number of games display d121 is a number indicating the longest period of the AT state, so that it is not necessary to execute the AT continuation suggestion effect any more.

Finally, the slot machine 100 displays a character image indicating the end of the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G26-E, which is the end of the game G26. As a result, the player knows that the AT state is terminated.

In addition, although FIG. 45 shows the case where the total number of games is notified in two times, it is of course possible to notify the total number of games in three or more times. For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (a-2), when the period of the AT state is 70 games, the 70 games are divided into 10, 20, and 40, and the first total number of games is notified for the 10th and 2nd times. The total number of games may be notified as 20 and the third total number of games may be notified as 70.

FIG. 47 (a) is a timing chart relating to game progress when the period of the AT state is 20 games (normal number), and FIG. 47 (b) shows each game G21 to G26-shown in FIG. 47 (a). It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the AT game number notification effect d120 in E. The games G21 to G26-S shown in FIG. 47A indicate the start of the game, and G26-E indicates the end of the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, the case where the total number of games is notified is shown in two steps. Specifically, the number of notifications in the notification number table shown in FIG. The notification pattern when 2 is selected is shown. Specifically, this is a case where 10 games are displayed on the first total number of games display d121 and 20 correct answers are displayed on the second total number of games display d121. In FIG. 47, the difference from FIG. 45 will be mainly described.

First, the slot machine 100 performs the first total number of games display d121 in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G21 that has started the AT state, and displays 10 games. As a result, the player grasps that the period of the AT state starting from now on is 10 games.

As the game progresses, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating one game in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G23, which is the tenth game in the AT state. The remaining game number display d122 is an AT continuation suggestion display d122S. By looking at the AT continuation suggestion display d122S, the player expects that the AT state will continue, although there are several games remaining in the AT state based on the notification.

Next, the slot machine 100 performs the second total number of games display d121 in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G24, which is the next game of the game G23 (11th game in the AT state), and displays 20 games. The second total number of games display d121 displays the correct number of games for the entire period of the AT state. As a result, the player knows that the AT state will continue in the future and that the first total number of games display d121 is an erroneous number. Further, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating 10 games.

As the game further progresses, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating one game in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G26-S, which is the 20th game in the AT state. Here, the remaining game number display d122 in the game G26 is also the AT continuation suggestion display d122S. That is, when 20 is displayed on the second total number of games display d121, the AT continuation suggestion display d122S is performed when the number of remaining games in the AT state based on the notification is equal to or less than the threshold value. The 20 shown in the second total number of games display d121 is not a number indicating the longest period of the AT state, and is for suggesting the possibility of performing the third total number of games display d121. By looking at the AT continuation suggestion display d122S, the player expects that the AT state will continue even though the number of remaining games in the AT state based on the notification is one game.

However, the slot machine 100 displays a character image indicating the end in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G26-E, which is the end of the game G26. As a result, the player knows that the AT state is terminated.

FIG. 48 (a) is a timing chart relating to game progress when the period of the AT state is 55 games (number of suggested settings), and FIG. 48 (b) is an AT game in each game shown in FIG. 48 (a). It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the number notification effect d120. The games G21 to G26-S shown in FIG. 48A indicate the start of the game, and G26-E indicates the end of the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 48, the case where the total number of games is notified in two steps is shown. For details, see No. 1 in the notification frequency table shown in FIG. The notification pattern when 2 is selected is shown. Specifically, this is a case where 20 games are displayed on the first total number of games display d121 and 55 correct answers are displayed on the second total number of games display d121. In FIG. 48, the differences from FIGS. 45 and 47 will be mainly described.

First, the slot machine 100 performs the first total number display d121 in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G21 that has started the AT state, and displays 20 games. As a result, the player grasps that the period of the AT state starting from now on is 20 games.

As the game progresses, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating one game in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G23, which is the 20th game in the AT state. The remaining game number display d122 is an AT continuation suggestion display d122S. By looking at the AT continuation suggestion display d122S, the player expects that the AT state will continue even though the number of games remaining in the AT state based on the notification is one game.

Next, the slot machine 100 performs the second total number display d121 in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G24, which is the next game of the game G23 (21st game in the AT state), and displays 55 games. The second total number of games display d121 displays the correct number of games for the entire period of the AT state. As a result, the player knows that the AT state will continue in the future and that the first total number of games display d121 is an erroneous number.

As the game further progresses, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating one game in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G26-S, which is the 55th game in the AT state.

The remaining game number display d122 in the game G26 is not the AT continuation completion suggestion display d122S. There are certainly more than 55 games in the AT state (eg 70 games). However, since 55, which is the set suggestion number, is displayed in the second total game number display d121, when the third total game number display d121 is performed after the setting suggestion number is displayed, the second total game number display d121 is displayed. This is because the displayed number is denied and the player is skeptical as to whether or not the set value suggested in the second total number display d121 is also denied.

In the present embodiment, the AT continuation suggestion display d122S is not displayed after the set suggestion number is displayed on the total game number display d121, but apart from this, the AT continuation suggestion display d122S is displayed under certain conditions. It may be displayed. For example, if there is a set suggestion number for notifying information that is more advantageous than the set suggestion number displayed on the total game number display d121, the AT continuation suggestion display d122S may be displayed thereafter. Specifically, even if 33 is displayed on the total number of games display d121, 55 may be displayed on the AT continuation suggestion display d122S thereafter. This is because 55, which is larger than 33, exists in the setting suggestion number of this embodiment. Further, if 55 is more likely to be set higher than 33, it will be advantageous information for the player.

Further, in the AT continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 45 to 48, the effect of changing the display mode of the remaining game number display d122 has been described, but the notification mode of the AT continuation suggestion effect is not limited to this.

For example, as shown in FIG. 49A, a plurality of types of AT continuation suggestion effects may be provided, and one AT continuation suggestion effect may be selected from the plurality of types. In FIG. 49 (a), when (1) the set suggestion number 33 or 55 is displayed on the total number of games display d121, the AT continuation suggestion effect is not executed thereafter, but (2) the total number of games is displayed d121. When a number other than 33 and 55 is displayed in the above, it is indicated that one of a plurality of types of AT continuation suggestion effects is selected and the selected AT continuation suggestion effect is executed (AT continuation). / The end suggestion effect may not be executed).

For example, as shown in FIG. 49B, when two types of AT continuation suggestion effects are prepared and the set suggestion number is notified in the next total number of games display d121, the probability that the effect A is selected is produced. If B is set to be higher than the probability of being selected, but the number of suggested suggestions is not notified in the next total number of games display d121, the probability of selecting effect B is higher than the probability of selecting effect A. May be set to be high. When the effect A is executed as the AT continuation suggestion effect, the player can raise the expectation. Whether or not to notify the set suggestion number on the total number of games display d121 is based on the notification pattern determined by the lottery process using the notification number table described above.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), the effect A sets the display color of the number of remaining games in the AT state to red and the execution period of the effect is 5 games, while the effect B is the remaining games in the AT state. The display color of the number may be green, and the execution period of the effect may be three games, which is a shorter effect period than the effect A. That is, the effect A may be a more conspicuous effect in terms of color and execution period than the effect B.

In the AT game number notification effect of the present embodiment, when the total number of games is notified in a plurality of times, the total number of games is notified a plurality of times over the plurality of games, but as shown in FIG. 50, 1 The total number of games may be notified a plurality of times in the game. In the modified example shown in FIG. 50, the case where the total number of games is notified in two times is shown, 20 games are displayed in the first total number of games display d121, and the correct answer is displayed in the second total number of games display d121. It shows the case of displaying 70 games of.

More specifically, the slot machine 100 performs the first total number of games display d121 at the time t31 of the start lever operation of the game that started the AT state in the AT game number notification effect d120, and then performs the AT game number notification effect. At the time point t33 after the development, the second total number display d121 is performed. In this way, the total number of games from the second time onward may be notified according to the progress of the production instead of the progress of the game.

<Last AT state>
Next, the last AT state in the privilege period will be described. Here, the final AT state of the privilege period is, for example, an AT state set as one set of 50 games (the number may be added), and the normal state is started after the AT state ends. AT state, that is, when the number of games in the privilege period reaches the limiter, or when it is decided that the normal period will start after the AT state ends because the number of games in the privilege period is near the limiter. Means the AT state of. In the present embodiment, a process of correcting the number of AT games (hereinafter, referred to as an AT game number correction process) may be executed for the final setting of the AT state.

FIG. 51 (a) is a diagram illustrating an outline of the AT game number correction process. The number of AT games in the AT state starting from the game G41 was 70 games as a result of the AT game number lottery (see FIG. 36), but when 70 games from the game G41 are exhausted, 1000 games which is a limiter of the privilege period (Game G44> 1000). Therefore, in such a case, in the present embodiment, the AT game number correction process is executed to correct the set number of AT games. In the example shown in FIG. 51 (a), 70 games are corrected to 50 games, the number of AT games in the last AT state is set to 50, and the AT state and the privilege period end in the game G42 1000 games before. doing.

When correcting the number of AT games with respect to the setting of the final AT state, as shown in FIG. 51 (b-1), the number of AT games is set to the number of remaining games up to 1000 games (games G41 to G43). There is also an idea to end the AT state by correcting to (the number of games up to) and exhausting 1000 games during the privilege period. However, in the AT game number correction process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 (b-2), the AT state is terminated before the limiter. This is because the possibility that the corrected halfway AT game number becomes the setting suggestion number cannot be excluded.

In addition, when the last AT state is ended before the limiter, the expected state is set after the last AT state is finished even if the number of games up to the limiter is small, and the limiter is reached in the expected state. Although there is an idea of ending the privilege period in the expected state, in the AT game number correction process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b-2), the last one is before the limiter. The AT state and the privilege period are terminated at the same time. That is, the AT state is prevented from ending in the expected state when the number of games up to the limiter is small. This is because the expected state is the period when the number of medals is reduced, so that the player does not feel lost near the limiter and the privilege period ends comfortably when the most medals are won.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the content of the AT game number correction process when the number of AT games in the AT state is determined to be 70 games as a result of the AT game number lottery. The numerical values shown in FIG. 52 are examples and are not limited thereto.

For example, when the AT state is started when the number of digested games in the privilege period is less than 855 games, 70 games are set without correction, and when the number of digested games in the privilege period starts in 885-914 games, the AT state is started. Is corrected and 50 games are set.

In the AT game number correction process of the present embodiment, if the number of AT games obtained by the AT game number lottery is the same, as shown in FIG. 52B, the number of remaining AT games up to the limiter is large at that time. The more, the number of AT games in the AT state is corrected so that the privilege period becomes shorter. That is, according to the AT game number correction process of the present embodiment, if the number of AT games before correction is the same, the longer the period of the last set AT state, the shorter the privilege period as a result, and the setting is made. The shorter the period of the last AT state, the longer the privilege period tends to be as a result. This is to allow the player to comfortably end the AT state and suppress the number of medals paid out.

In the present embodiment, the set suggestion number is not selected in the AT game number lottery for the last AT state, but the set suggestion number may be selected separately. However, when the set suggestion number is selected for the last AT state, the normal number closest to the set suggestion number and smaller than the set suggestion number is selected again, and this normal number is selected as the last AT. It is set as the number of AT games for the state.

FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating a setting suggestion effect executed after the end of the last AT state of the privilege period. FIG. 53A is a diagram showing the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect, and FIG. 53B is a diagram for explaining the type of the setting suggestion effect.

The setting suggestion effect is an effect using a character, and the effect image display device 157 displays a character image d130 for displaying the character. As shown in FIG. 53A, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the third stop operation of the final game in the final AT state. When executing the setting suggestion effect, one of the characters is determined from a plurality of characters based on the character lottery, and the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the determined character.

FIG. 53B is a diagram illustrating a plurality of characters appearing in the setting suggestion effect. In the present embodiment, the characters 1, 2 and 3 are characters that do not suggest a set value, and the characters 4, 5 and 6 are characters that suggest a set value. For example, (1) character 4 is selected with a 10% probability when the set value is even, and (2) character 5 is selected with a 20% probability when the set value is 4, 5 or 6. (3) Character 6 may be selected with a probability of 20% when the set value is 5 or 6. The player can guess the set value by looking at the character image d130 of the setting suggestion effect.

In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the last AT state is finished. Therefore, when the remaining game number display d122 of the AT game number notification effect d120 described above is executed in the last AT state, the setting suggestion number is set. It is desirable not to display it. This is because if the number of setting suggestions is notified in the final AT state, the expectation of the setting suggestion effect cannot be increased even if the setting suggestion effect is subsequently executed. For example, if the last AT state is 55 games (number of suggested settings), the probability that the set value is high when it is displayed that there are 55 games remaining at the start of the last AT state. Is estimated to be high. In addition, even if it is planned to execute the setting suggestion effect after the last AT state is finished, it does not provide useful information to the player who sees the effect.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a modified example of the execution time of the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggestion effect of the present embodiment is executed after the last AT state ends as shown in FIG. 54 (a), but is executed in the last AT state as shown in FIG. 54 (b). May be good.

<Operation of slot machine>
Hereinafter, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 according to the present embodiment (fifth embodiment) will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 55 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S501. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S502, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S503, a winning line confirmation process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined. In this embodiment, 1 to 3 medals can be inserted.

In step S504, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number value generation circuit 316 is performed.

In step S505, the winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S504, and the internal lottery is performed. Preparations are made for transmitting an internal lottery command indicating the result to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

Here, the internal lottery command when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won will be described. When the AT system game state is in the AT state and the small winning combination 3a to 3f are internally won. Information indicating that the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f have been internally elected is transmitted to.

In step S506, the reel stop data selection process for selecting the reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

Further, in step S505, a lottery process relating to the game state of the AT system is executed. For example, in the normal state, the transition lottery 1 and 2 are executed, and in the expected state, the AT transition lottery 1 or 2 is executed. If the AT transition lottery 2 is won, the expected state end lottery is executed.

In step S507, the main control unit / operation condition display setting process for setting the operation navigation of the main control unit 300 is executed. In the main control unit / operation condition display setting process, the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the AT state, and the operation navigation is set in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C).

In step S508, the reel rotation start process is executed to start the rotation of all the reels 110 to 112.

In step S509, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of the reel stop data is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of lead-in frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S510. In this step S109, for each stop operation, the stop button reception command for the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been stopped (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). For the third stop operation, the stop button reception 2 command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel is prepared. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S510, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning combination processing, when a pattern combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small winning combination 1 (watermelon). Further, in step S510, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S511, the medal granting process is performed. In the medal granting process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S512, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state (RT system game state, AT system game state) is performed, and the game state is transferred when the start condition or end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current game state.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S502 and repeating the above-described processing.

The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S1006 of FIG. 16) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described above.

<Game state control processing>
Next, the game state control process will be described with reference to FIG. 56A. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the game state control process in step S512 of FIG. 55.

In step S601, the RT system game state control process is performed.

In step S602, AT-based game state control processing (details will be described later) is performed.

In step S603, preparations are made for transmitting the game state command to the first sub-control unit 400. Here, the game state command includes the RT-type game state, the AT-type game state, the total number of AT games, the number of remaining AT games, the number of stocks in the AT state, the notification pattern of the number of AT games, and the type of story production. Information such as is included.

<AT-based game state control processing>
Next, the AT-based game state control process will be described with reference to FIG. 56 (b). FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the game state control process of the AT system in step S602 of FIG. 56.

In step S701, the result of the lottery process relating to the transition to the game state of the AT system executed in step S505 is acquired. For example, in the normal state, the results of the transition lottery 1 and 2, and in the expected state, the results of the AT transition lottery 1 or 2 are acquired. Further, when the AT transition lottery 2 is won, the result of the expected state end lottery is acquired.

In step S702, the state transition process A for setting the AT system game state is executed based on the result of the lottery process related to the AT system game state transition. In the state transition process A, for example, when the transition lottery 1 is won in step S701, the expected number of games lottery is executed, the number of games in the expected state is determined, and the game state of the AT system is set to the expected state. Further, for example, when the transition lottery 2 and the T transition lottery 1 or 2 are won in step S701, the AT game number lottery is executed to determine the number of games in the AT state. Then, when the transition lottery 2 is won or the AT transition lottery 2 is won and the expected state end lottery is won, the AT system game state is set to the AT state. Further, when setting the AT state, a lottery process using the notification number table is executed to determine the production mode of the AT game number notification effect d120 (the total number of games is notified at one time, or a plurality of times. Whether to notify the total number of games, etc.).

In step S703, counting processing is performed. In the counting process, for example, when the privilege period is in effect, the value of the privilege period counter is incremented. Further, for example, when in the expected state, the value of the counter for counting the number of games in the expected state (hereinafter referred to as the expected state counter) is incremented, and when in the AT state, the counter for counting the number of games in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as , AT status counter) is incremented.

In step S704, it is determined whether or not the counter value counted up in step S703 has reached a threshold value for shifting the game state of the AT system (hereinafter, state shift value). When the counter value reaches the state transition value, the process proceeds to step S705, and if not, the AT system game state control process ends.

In step S705, the state transition process B for setting the game state of the AT system is executed based on the counter value in step 703. In the state transition process B, for example, when the value of the privilege period counter reaches the limiter during the privilege period, the game state of the AT system is set to the normal state. Further, when the value of the expected state counter reaches the specified number of games in the expected state with the stock number 0, the AT system game state is set to the normal state, while the stock number 1 or more is set in the expected state. When the value of the expected state counter reaches the specified number of games, the game state of the AT system is set to the AT state. Further, when the value of the AT state counter reaches the specified number of games in the AT state, the game state of the AT system is set to the expected state.

<Internal lottery command processing>
Next, the internal lottery command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a). The internal lottery command process is a process corresponding to the internal lottery command in the command process of step S3004 of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 18A. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the internal lottery command processing in detail.

In step S3301, it is determined whether or not the game state of the AT system is the AT state. If the game state of the AT system is the AT state, the process proceeds to step S3302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3304.

In step S3302, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) has been won based on the internal lottery command. If the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is won, the process proceeds to step S3303, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3304.

In step S3303, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed with the operation order of the correct answer of the internally won small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) as the content of the operation navigation. For example, when the small winning combination 3b is internally won, the effect setting of the operation navigation indicating the operation order of "right, left, middle" is performed. As a result, the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is executed (see FIGS. 9B and 9C).

In step S3304, other internal lottery command processing is executed.

<Game status command processing>
Next, the game state command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (b). The internal lottery command process is a process corresponding to the game state command in the command process of step S3004 of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 18A. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the game state command processing in detail.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the game state of the AT system has been updated to the expected state in the game state control process of the game. If the expected state is updated in the game, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3403.

In step S3402, the story effect is set so that the story effect is executed from the next game. The type of story effect is based on the information contained in the game state control command. As a result, the story effect by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is executed from the next game (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

On the other hand, in step S3403, it is determined whether or not the game state of the AT system has been updated to the AT state in the game state control process of the game. If it is updated to the AT state in the game, the process proceeds to step S3404, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3404, the AT game number notification effect is set so that the AT game number notification effect is executed from the next game. The production mode of the AT game number notification effect is determined based on the information included in the game state control command. As a result, from the next game, the AT game number notification effect is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIGS. 45 (b), 47 (b), and 48 (b)).

In step S3405, other game state command processing is executed.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in the configuration of the AT system gaming state.

FIG. 58 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment (this embodiment).

In the sixth embodiment, the configurations, functions, and processes different from those in the fifth embodiment will be mainly described, and the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals with respect to other configurations, functions, and processes, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The AT-based gaming state of the present embodiment includes a normal state, an expected state (CZ), an AT state, and an AT state (ending). That is, the AT-based gaming state of the present embodiment is characterized by including an AT state (ending).

The AT state (ending) is a gaming state in which the operation navigation is executed, as in the AT state. The AT state (ending) is a state in which the number of medals paid out> the number of medals inserted, and the number of medals of the player increases. Further, the AT state (ending) is a state in which a continuous effect that is not executed in other AT states is executed. In addition, when the AT state (ending) ends, an AT end effect indicating the end of the privilege period is performed before starting the normal state.

The AT state (ending) is set when the number of digested games in the privilege period reaches 990 games in the AT state. Then, when 10 games are exhausted in the AT state (ending), that is, when the number of digested games in the privilege period reaches 1000 games and the limiter in the privilege period is reached, the AT state (ending) is ended and the normal Move to the state. As described above, since the AT state (ending) is a fixed period of 10 games, if the AT state (ending) is entered, 1000 games can be reliably consumed in the privilege period.

For example, if only the right is obtained until the number of games in the privilege period reaches 991 games, the AT state (ending) is set when the number of digested games reaches 990 games, and the subsequent 10 games are set to the AT state (ending). Become. When there is a limiter in the privilege period, it may not be possible to give the player a feeling of loss even if the limiter is reached and ended. When a game with one or two bets is played in the AT state (ending), the fixed period of the AT state (ending) is not changed. This is because it is not preferable to change the number of games because the continuous production corresponding to the fixed period of 10 games is executed.

Further, in the AT state (ending) of the present embodiment, since the completion of the privilege period is guaranteed, the lottery for newly granting the AT right (for example, the AT transition lottery) is not executed in the AT state (ending). .. If the result of executing the lottery and granting the AT right is notified, the player may feel lost when reaching the limiter and ending, but the lottery for newly granting the AT right is not executed. As a result, the privilege period can be comfortably ended.

FIG. 59A is a diagram showing a count period c1 for counting the number of games in the privilege period and a count period c2 for counting the number of games in the AT state (ending). In the case of the present embodiment, the privilege period counter counts the number of games from the start of the privilege period, and when the value of the privilege period counter reaches 1000, the AT state (ending) is terminated together with the privilege period. When the value of the privilege period counter reaches 990, the AT state (ending) is set, the ending counter starts counting the number of games in the AT state (ending) from the next game, and the value of the ending counter becomes 10. When it arrives, the privilege period ends with the AT status (ending).

FIG. 59 (b) is a threshold value referred to by the privilege period counter that counts the count period c1, and FIG. 59 (c) is a threshold value that the ending counter that counts the count period c2 refers to. These thresholds are stored in ROM 306 in advance. The first threshold value shown in FIG. 59 (b) is a numerical value for starting the AT state (ending) and starting counting of the ending counter, and the second threshold value is a numerical value for ending the privilege period. The threshold value shown in FIG. 59 (c) is a numerical value for ending the AT state (ending).

The state immediately before the AT state (ending) is always the AT state and does not reach the expected state. This is because the expected state is a period during which the number of medals is reduced, and if there is an expected state before the AT state (ending) is started, the player may feel lost. That is, when the AT state (ending) is not executed in the state immediately before the AT state (ending), the expected state is not reached when the AT state is ended, and the privilege state is ended and the normal state is reached.

Considering that there is an AT state (ending) next to the AT state, the AT state ends without displaying the display related to the number of medals acquired by the player before the start of the AT state (ending) in the AT state. It will be displayed in the next game (starting game in the normal state). When the AT state (ending) is started after the AT state, the AT state (ending) can be started without displaying the number of medals won by the player once, and the AT state (ending) ends. Sometimes it is possible to display the number of medals won by the player. On the other hand, when the AT state (ending) is not started after the AT state, the number of medals won by the player can be displayed at the end of the AT state.

FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing an outline of the AT state (ending) end determination process of the present embodiment. The AT state (ending) end determination process is one process included in the game state control process (step S512 in FIG. 55).

In the AT state (ending) end determination process of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value by the ending counter has reached 10 (step S1), and when the counter value by the ending counter reaches 10 (step). In S1: YES), the AT state (ending) and the privilege period are terminated. Therefore, when the ending counter is operating normally, the AT state (ending) and the privilege period are terminated without using the privilege period counter.

On the other hand, when the counter value by the ending counter does not reach 10 (step S1: NO), it is determined whether or not the counter value by the privilege period counter has reached 1000 (step S2), and the privilege period counter When the counter value of 1000 is reached (step S2: YES), the AT state (ending) and the privilege period are terminated. Therefore, the AT state (ending) and the privilege period are terminated by using the privilege period counter when the ending counter is not operating normally. Step S2 is provided in preparation for such an unforeseen situation.

FIG. 60B is a timing chart showing a state in which the AT state (ending) and the privilege period are terminated based on the counter value of the privilege period counter under the condition that the ending counter is not operating normally. In this way, even when the ending counter is not operating normally, since the privilege period counter exists, the AT state (ending) and the privilege period can be surely ended.

Although not shown, a separate counter independent of the privilege period counter may be provided to count the privilege period. In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, even if the ending counter malfunctions, the privilege period and the AT state (ending) can be ended by the privilege period counter. Since the ending counter starts counting based on the value of the privilege period counter, if the privilege period counter malfunctions, the ending counter may also be affected by this malfunction. Therefore, another counter is provided for further certainty. In this case, even if a problem occurs in the privilege period counter and the ending counter, the privilege period and the AT state (ending) can be terminated.

In the present embodiment, the limiter of the privilege period is limited to the number of digested games, but if the limiter of the privilege period has other conditions (for example, the number of medals paid out, the number of medals won, etc.) in addition to the number of digested games, It is preferable that this other counter counts an index (for example, the number of medals paid out, the number of medals won, etc.) different from the index (for example, the number of games) counted by the privilege period counter.

FIG. 61A is a diagram showing an outline of the production of the AT state (ending).

In the AT state (ending), one episode of continuous production (hereinafter referred to as ending production) is executed for each game over 10 games. In the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 61A, the number of games displaying the number of games in the AT state (ending) image d140 (for example, in the case of the first game in the AT state (ending), the first episode, 1 / A character image such as 10) is displayed on the effect image display device 157. This is to make the player recognize the number of remaining games in the AT state (ending).

The number of games image d140 does not display the number of games during the privilege period. This is because if there are a plurality of types of game number displays, the player is deprived of attention to grasping the numerical value and cannot enjoy the game. That is, the value of the ending counter is displayed on the game number image d140 of the present embodiment, and the value of the privilege period counter is not displayed.

FIG. 61B is a diagram showing in detail the content of the ending effect of the tenth game in the AT state (ending). In the tenth game in the AT state (ending), the slot machine 100 displays the number of games image d140 showing the ten games based on the start lever operation, and the final game showing that it is the final game in the AT state (ending). The preview image d150 (for example, a character image such as "last game") is displayed on the effect image display device 157. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the AT state (ending) ends in the game at the start of the game.

The final game preview image d150 whose display has started is erased when a predetermined time T1 (for example, about 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start lever operation. Here, the predetermined time T1 is set shorter than the time T2 (for example, 0.8 seconds) from the start lever operation to the activation of the first stop operation.

In the ending effect of the present embodiment, the number of games image d140 is displayed over 10 games, but the number of games displaying the number of games image d140 is not limited to this. For example, the number of games image d140 may be displayed from the sixth game to the fifth game in the AT state (ending). That is, in this case, the number of games in the AT state (ending) is not displayed until the last 5 games in the AT state (ending) are reached. By shortening the story-like production period, it is possible to shorten the period for consciousness of the end of the AT state (ending).

FIG. 62A shows the operation sequence of the operation navigation in the first stop operation when the player internally wins the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the final game in the AT state (ending) and executes the operation navigation. The timing chart is shown when a stop operation that does not comply (stop operation with incorrect answer) is performed.

In this case, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the operation navigation image d10, the number of games image d140 showing 10 games, and the final game preview image d150 based on the start lever operation, and after a predetermined time T1 has elapsed from the start lever operation. , The display of the final game preview image d150 is erased, and the display of the operation navigation image d10 is erased based on the first stop operation of the incorrect answer. As a result, since the ending game number image d140 is erased during the first stop operation, the impression of the last game can be weakened even if there is a mistake in the stop operation.

Since the predetermined time T1 is shorter than the time T2 (for example, 0.8 seconds) from the start lever operation to the activation of the first stop operation, even if there is a mistake in the stop operation during the first stop operation, the operation navigation The display of the final game preview image d150 is erased before the display of the image d10 is erased. Therefore, it may be difficult to give the impression that the state of the last game continues even after the mistake of the stop operation. In addition to the case where the first stop operation is an incorrect answer operation, the second stop operation and the third stop operation may be an incorrect answer operation, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed. Occasionally, since the display of the final game preview image d150 is erased, it may be difficult to give the impression that the state of the last game continues even after the mistake of the stop operation.

The predetermined time T1 may be set to about 2.0 seconds from the start lever operation. When the time from the start lever operation to the activation of the first stop operation is T2 (for example, 0.8 seconds), the display of the final game preview image d150 can be erased after the first stop operation is performed. The time is higher than half of the time required for one game (about 4.1 seconds), so the impression of the last game may be weakened.

Here, a mistake in the stop operation means that as a result of performing an operation that does not perform an operation according to the operation navigation image d10 (an image suggesting the pressing order), the player does not have or reduces the number of medals that can be obtained. To do. For example, if the operation navigation image d10 is not an image suggesting the push order but an image suggesting an internal winning combination or an image designating a stop symbol, the profit obtained by the player as a result of the operation not following this is obtained. It also includes the absence or reduction. In other words, a mistake in the stop operation may be an operation that causes a so-called omission in which the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination cannot be won, or if there are multiple types of internal winning combination, among the internal winning combination. In some cases, it is not possible to win a prize for the symbol combination related to the most advantageous role for the player.

FIG. 62B is a timing chart of a modified example in which the erasing timing of the final game preview image d150 is not the time but the content of the stop operation. Similar to FIG. 62 (a), FIG. 62 (b) also shows that when the player internally wins the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the final game in the AT state (ending) and executes the operation navigation, the player stops first. The case where a stop operation (incorrect stop operation) that does not follow the operation order of the operation navigation is performed in the operation is shown.

In this case, the display of the final game preview image d150 is erased based on the first stop operation of the incorrect answer. When the correct stop operation is performed, the display of the final game preview image d150 is deleted after the third stop operation.

In addition to the case where the first stop operation is an incorrect answer operation, the second stop operation and the third stop operation may be an incorrect answer operation, but the first stop operation is an incorrect answer operation. The display of the final game preview image d150 is erased (not shown) based on the operation of the incorrect answer as in the case of. Further, based on the operation of stopping the incorrect answer, both the display of the final game preview image d150 and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. As long as the correct stop operation is performed, the display of the operation navigation corresponding to the stop button (any of the stop buttons 137 to 139) that performed the stop operation is deleted, and the display of the operation navigation corresponding to the remaining stop operation remains. However, when an incorrect stop operation is performed, the display of the operation navigation corresponding to the stop operation remaining at that time is deleted. Therefore, if the display of the final game preview image d150 at that time is also erased, many displays will be erased all at once from the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. That is, it becomes easy to notice that the display of the final game preview image d150 has disappeared. This may give the impression that it is no longer the final game.

<Last AT state, AT state (ending)>
FIG. 63A is a diagram illustrating an outline of the AT game number correction process of the present embodiment. The AT game number correction process of the present embodiment is substantially the same as the content of the AT game number correction process of the fifth embodiment, but as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), 10 games after the AT state. Since there is a fixed AT state (ending), when correcting the number of AT games, the correction value is determined in consideration of 10 games. Also in this embodiment, the AT state (ending) and the privilege period are terminated in the game G53, which is 1000 games before.

When the AT state (ending) is terminated before the limiter, as shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b-2), the expected state is intervened after the final AT state is terminated. Instead, the privilege period ends in the AT state (ending). Since the privilege period is a period in which medals are reduced, the AT state (ending) is set after the last AT period, and the privilege period is comfortably ended without giving the player a feeling of loss in the vicinity of the limiter.

FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a setting suggestion effect executed after the AT state (ending) of the privilege period ends. As shown in FIG. 64A, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the third stop operation of the final game in the AT state (ending).

FIGS. 64 (b) and 64 (c) are diagrams showing a modified example of the execution time of the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggestion effect of the present embodiment may be executed at the start of the AT state (ending) as shown in FIG. 64 (b), or may be executed at the start of the AT state (ending) as shown in FIG. 64 (c). It may be executed in the meantime.

<Other variants>
In the sixth embodiment, the number of games in the AT state (ending) is fixed at 10 games. However, apart from this, the number of games in the AT state (ending) may be variable. For example, the game may end when 10 games in which a predetermined condition is satisfied in the AT state (ending) are exhausted. The establishment of the predetermined condition is, for example, a game in which the number of inserted medals (number of bets) in the AT state (ending) is three. That is, when the number of bets is one or two, it is not counted as the number of games for which a predetermined condition is satisfied in the AT state (ending). In a game with one or two bets, the winning probability of the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is set lower than in a game with three bets, and the operation navigation is executed even in the AT state. Since the probability is low and the specifications are disadvantageous in terms of ball output, it is intended that the disadvantaged game is not counted as the AT state (ending).

In this modified example, it is necessary to end the privilege period when 1000 games are consumed in the privilege period while considering that the game with one or two bets is played. Therefore, 1000 games It was decided to start the AT state (ending) when the value becomes a value before 990 (for example, 950) obtained by subtracting 10 games from.

FIG. 65A is a time chart showing the AT state (ending) of such a modified example. FIG. 65 (b) is a threshold value referred to by the privilege period counter for counting the count period c1, and FIG. 65 (c) is a threshold value referred to by the ending counter for counting the count period c2.

In this modification, when the value of the privilege period counter reaches the first threshold value of 950 in the AT state, the AT state (ending) is started. That is, the condition for shifting to the AT state (ending) is satisfied when 950 games are consumed during the privilege period.

In the AT state (ending), the ending counter operates, and when the value of the ending counter reaches the threshold value of 10, the AT state (ending) and the privilege period end. Here, the ending counter of this modification counts only the game of three bets in the AT state (ending). The privilege period counter of this modification counts the number of games in the privilege period regardless of the number of bets.

In the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), the privilege period started from the 951st game of the privilege period ends at the 962th game. This means that there were two games in which the number of bets was not three between the 951st game and the 962nd game.

As described above, in this modification, since the ending counter does not count the games of one or two bets, the period of the AT state (ending) may be extended to 10 games or more. Therefore, in this modification, unlike the case of the sixth embodiment, the start time of the AT state (ending) is set to the 951st game of the privilege period.

However, extending the AT state (ending) period without limitation is not possible because it can be a hotbed for fraudulent games. Therefore, when the privilege period counter value reaches the second threshold value of 1000, the AT state is forcibly extended. (Ending) will be terminated and the privilege period will be terminated. That is, the value of the privilege period counter is updated even in the game of one or two bets.

As described in the sixth embodiment, in the AT state (ending), the story effect is executed for each game, but in the game with one or two bets, the effect is not advanced. There is. For example, in a game with one or two bets, the story effect of the game with the latest bet number of three may be executed again, or the story effect of the game with the latest bet number of three may be executed again. May be left stopped. For example, when the effect A is executed in the third game (three-card game) in the AT state (ending), the effect A may be executed in the fourth game (two-card game).

[Other embodiments related to the fifth to sixth embodiments]
In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the number of games consumed during the privilege period is used as the limiter for the privilege period. However, the limiter of the privilege period is not limited to this. For example, the number of games consumed during the privilege period or the number of medals acquired during the privilege period may be set as the limiter. In the embodiment described below, the privilege period ends when 1000 games are consumed in the privilege period or when the cumulative number of medals acquired (MY) in the privilege period becomes 2000 or more.

Here, MY is a value counted by the MY counter, and in the medal granting process of the game, when (1) the number of payouts> the number of inserts, the added value = the number of payouts-the number of inserts, and the MY counter While adding the added value to the value, (2) When the number of payouts ≤ the number of inserts, the subtraction value = the number of inserts − the number of payouts, and the subtraction value is subtracted from the value of the MY counter. As a result of the update, if the value of the MY counter is <0, the value of the MY counter is set to 0. That is, the value of the MY counter does not become negative.

In the embodiment described below, it is assumed that the game state of the AT system is the same as that of the fifth embodiment. That is, it will be described as an embodiment in which the AT state (ending) does not exist. Further, the image display of the game expected to be the final in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as the final expected game) will be described below. Here, the final predicted game in the AT state has a MY value of 2000 in the game. Means a game that can be more than that. For example, at present, MY is 1995, and if the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won in the game, if the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is won, the MY is 2003 by paying out 8 medals. It becomes a piece and reaches the limiter of the privilege period. However, if the small role 3 (Oshijun Bell) is not won, the MY remains 1995, and the limiter of the privilege period is not reached. The determination as to whether or not the game is the final expected game in the AT state is performed when the start lever of the game is operated, and is determined based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery process. Then, in the final expected game in the AT state, when the limiter of the privilege period is reached, the game becomes the final game in the AT state.

<Production image of the final prediction game in AT state>
The production image of the final prediction game in the AT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 74. In the following, unless otherwise specified, the case where the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won and the final prediction game in the AT state is reached will be described. That is, the case where the operation navigation is executed in the final prediction game in the AT state will be described. Further, as shown in FIG. 66A, the start lever operation of the final prediction game in the AT state is the time point t61, the first stop operation time is the time point t62, the second stop operation time is the time point t63, and the third stop operation time. Is referred to as the time point t64 and thereafter.

FIG. 66B is a diagram illustrating a change in the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the final prediction game in the AT state. FIG. 66B shows a method of erasing the final game preview image d150 over time. The characters (AT game image) on the screen shown in FIGS. 66 and later mean that an image of the AT game such as a background image in the AT state is displayed.

The slot machine 100 simultaneously displays the final game preview image d150 and the operation navigation image d10 from the time point t61 based on the start lever operation of the final prediction game in the AT state. The slot machine 100 erases the final game preview image d150 after a predetermined time T1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the time point t61. Since the predetermined time T1 is set shorter than the time T2 (for example, 0.8 seconds) from the start lever operation to the activation of the first stop operation, the final game preview image d150 is erased before the first stop operation. Will be done.

When the player performs the correct stop operation, the slot machine 100 erases the navigation image d10 of the corresponding stop operation according to each stop operation, and displays the AT end image d160 after the third stop operation.

The AT end image d160 is an effect image indispensable at the end of the AT state in order to display the fact that the AT state has ended and the degree of profit in the AT state (total number of payouts, etc.). However, if the AT end image d160 is suddenly displayed without displaying the final game preview image d150 at the start of the game, the player feels abrupt. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the AT end image d160 is displayed after the final game preview image d150 is displayed.

On the other hand, when the player performs an incorrect answer stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays all the navigation images d10 at the time of the incorrect answer stop operation (for example, FIG. 66B is a mistake in the first stop operation). to erase. Here, if an incorrect answer is operated in the final prediction game in the AT state, the limiter of the privilege period is not reached, so the AT end image d160 is not displayed, and the AT state continues in the next game.

In the next game, it is possible to perform the final game preview image d150 as in the previous game, but if it is determined that the number of medals paid out> the number of medals inserted in the next game, the cumulative number of medals won during the privilege period ( Since the number of MY) does not exceed 2000, the final game preview image d150 is not performed. Specifically, when the internal winning result after inserting three medals is the internal winning of a role with payout of three or more medals, the final game preview image d150 is performed, and the internal winning result after inserting three medals is obtained. , The final game preview image d150 is not performed when the winning combination is an outlier, a replay combination, or a combination with less than 3 payouts. It is possible to prevent the player from being notified excessively frequently.

FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a production image of a conventional final prediction game in an AT state. This is an effect image when the final game preview image d150 is displayed in the final prediction game in the AT state.

Conventionally, the final game preview image d150 is displayed during the period expected to be the final game. This is because the slot machine 100 has a plurality of operations in one game, and therefore, it is considered that the operation of the player may be affected depending on the timing of erasing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 67, for example, when an incorrect stop operation is performed in the first stop operation, the display of the navigation image d10 is deleted after the first stop operation, but the display of the final game preview image d150 is continued. Was. The same applies even when an incorrect answer is performed in the second stop operation and the third stop operation. As a result, the AT state was continued while leaving the display indicating the final game, which made the player feel uncomfortable. Further, there is a possibility that the final game preview image d150 is continuously displayed in the next game.

In the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the display of the final game preview image d150 is erased before the stop operation.

FIG. 68 is a diagram of another example for explaining the change of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the final prediction game in the AT state. FIG. 68 shows a method of erasing the final game preview image d150 due to a mistake in the stop operation.

FIG. 68A shows a case where an incorrect stop operation is performed in the first stop operation, and the slot machine 100 erases the display of the final game preview image d150 based on the first stop operation. .. On the other hand, FIG. 68B shows a case where an incorrect stop operation is performed in the second stop operation, and the slot machine 100 erases the display of the final game preview image d150 based on the second stop operation. ing. When the correct stop operation is performed, the display of the final game notice image d150 is deleted after the third stop operation.

In this example, since the final game preview image d150 and the operation navigation image d10 are deleted at the same time based on the incorrect answer stop operation, it is possible to grasp that the final game is no longer due to an operation error.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect image in the final prediction game in the AT state. In this modification, the final game preview image d150 is not a character image, but an image of the entire screen whose color changes. More specifically, the final game preview image d150A is a color image that gradually darkens as the correct answer is stopped. When the game is started, the color of the screen changes darkly (change 1) before the first stop operation is performed, and when the first stop operation is performed, the color of the screen changes darkly (change 2), and the second When the stop operation is performed, the color of the screen changes darkly (change 3), and when the third stop operation is performed, the color of the screen changes darkly (change 4). Due to this change, the screen becomes dark in the order of change 1 <change 2 <change 3 <change 4. By gradually darkening the image, the AT background image is made difficult to see, and the end of the AT state is impressed. The final game preview image d150 may be a single color or an image in which a predetermined pattern is applied to the whole.

FIG. 69A shows a case where the correct stop operation is performed, and the final game preview image d150A is displayed as the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the third stop operation, and the stop operation progress. It gradually darkens, indicating that the AT end image d160 is displayed after the third stop operation.

FIG. 69B shows a case where an incorrect stop operation is performed. If the first stop operation is an operation error, the display of the final game preview image d150A is erased after the first stop operation, and the first stop operation is performed. 2 If the stop operation is an operation error, the display of the final game notice image d150A is erased after the second stop operation, and if the third stop operation is an operation error, the final game notice image after the third stop operation. The display of d150A indicates that it is erased.

In this way, the notice of the final game may be expressed by the color of the image instead of directly notifying the game by characters.

The color of the entire screen does not have to be changed. For example, the display area of the image suggesting the end may be enlarged each time the operation is performed. The player may be made aware that the end is approaching with the operation. Further, the color of the entire screen does not have to be changed. For example, the color may be changed only in the main screen area where the image changes as the game progresses. The player may be made aware that the end is approaching with the operation.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect image in the final prediction game in the AT state. In the modified example shown in FIG. 70A, the final game preview image d150B is started to be displayed before the operation navigation image d10, and the final game preview image d150B is gradually enlarged and displayed. As a result, the final game preview image d150B can be made to stand out.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 70B, the final game preview image d150C is displayed larger than the operation navigation image d10, and the final game preview image d150C and the operation navigation image d10 are displayed in an overlapping manner. This makes it easier for the player paying attention to the operation navigation to notice that the final game is in the AT state.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 70 (c), the final game preview image d150D is gradually enlarged and displayed, displayed on the entire screen, and then erased. During the enlarged display, the final game preview image d150D is displayed so as to overlap the operation navigation image d10. The final game preview image d150D is displayed at a time (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the time T2 (for example, 0.8 seconds) from the start lever operation to the activation of the first stop operation. As a result, even if the operation navigation image d10 is displayed so as to hinder the visibility, the player who pays attention to the operation navigation is the final game in the AT state without inducing a mistake in the stop operation of the player. It becomes easier to notice.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing another modified example of the effect image in the final prediction game in the AT state.

Specifically, FIG. 71 shows that when a stop operation error is made in the final prediction game in the AT state and the limiter of the privilege period is not reached, the game starts in the next game of the game regardless of the result of the winning combination internal winning process. The case where the final game notice image d150 is started to be displayed again from the time t61 of the lever operation is shown.

In this case, for example, the final game preview image d150 is displayed even if the limiter of the privilege period is not reached due to internal winning of the re-game combination or loss in the next game. As a result, since the final game preview image d150 is displayed many times over a plurality of games, the player can grasp that he / she is in the vicinity of the final game in the AT state.

Here, the second and subsequent final game notice images d150 may have the same display mode as the first final game notice image d150, or may have different display modes. In the latter case, for example, the second and subsequent final game preview images d150 may be displayed smaller than the first final game preview image d150. By displaying the final game preview image d150 for the second and subsequent times inconspicuously, other production images become more conspicuous, so that mistakes in the stop operation can be reduced.

The small display is an example of an inconspicuous display. For example, the display image may be reduced in density and the display portion may be moved to a corner portion to make the display inconspicuous. Further, in the latter case, for example, the second and subsequent final game notice images d150 may be displayed larger than the first final game notice image d150. By displaying the final game preview image d150 for the second and subsequent times in a conspicuous manner, it is possible to grasp that the player is in the vicinity of the final game in the AT state. The large display is an example of a conspicuous display. For example, the display may be made conspicuous by increasing the density of the display image or moving the display portion to the center.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect image in the final prediction game in the AT state.
Specifically, unlike FIG. 71, FIG. 72 shows the final game notice after the next game of the game when the limiter of the privilege period is not reached due to a mistake in the stop operation in the final prediction game in the AT state. The case where the image d150 is not displayed is shown. By displaying the final game preview image d150 once, the player determines that it has been recognized.

In this case, for example, the final game preview image d150 is not displayed regardless of whether the limiter of the privilege period is reached or not reached as a result of the winning combination internal lottery in the next game.

The final game preview image d150 of the modified example shown in FIGS. 71 and 72 shows a case where the final game preview image d150 is erased after a predetermined time T1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the time point t61.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 69, when the correct answer stop operation is performed, the display of the final game notice image d150 is continued, and when the incorrect answer stop operation is performed, the final game notice image d150 is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the display of the final game preview image d150 may be continued even when the incorrect answer is stopped.

Of course, in the case of an incorrect stop operation, the AT end image d160 is not displayed after the third stop operation. Further, in the case of the incorrect answer stop operation, the AT state continues, so that the AT end image d160 is deleted based on the medal insertion operation of the next game. That is, in the final prediction game in the AT state, the display of the final game preview image d150 may be continued until the limiter is reached and the AT end image d160 is displayed, regardless of the content of the stop operation. ..

In this way, there is a final game advance notice effect in which the effect mode changes according to the operation, and if there is no operation error during the final game advance notice effect, the AT end image is displayed after the third stop operation, while the final game is said. If there is an operation error during the advance notice effect, the AT end image may not be displayed and the display of the final game advance notice effect may be continued after the next game. Even if you do not notice that there was an operation error during operation, you can notice the operation error depending on the presence or absence of the AT end image.

Further, in the present embodiment, the final game preview image d150 is displayed in the game expected to be the final game in the AT state, that is, the last one game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the final game preview image is displayed over a plurality of games. The d170 may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 74, the final game preview image d170 may be displayed over the last three games. The final game preview image d170 in this case is an image that displays the number of remaining games as the game progresses. For example, it is displayed as "last 3G" at the time of the remaining 3 games, "last 2G" at the time of the remaining 2 games, and "last 1G" at the time of the remaining 1 game.

The determination of the last 3 games is determined from the value of the MY counter. For example, the final game preview image d170 may be started to be displayed when the value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined threshold value close to the limiter (for example, 1800).

FIG. 74A shows a case where the AT state is ended in three games after the final game preview image d150 is displayed by performing the stop operation according to the operation navigation. In the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), the AT state is terminated with the result that the game G71 wins a small win 3b, the game G72 loses, and the game G73 wins a small win 3b. That is, in this modified example, after the final game preview image d150 is started, the AT state is ended in 3 games regardless of the number of medals acquired in the last 3 games.

On the other hand, FIG. 74B shows a case where the AT state is not ended in 3 games after the final game preview image d150 is started to be displayed by performing the stop operation not following the operation navigation. In the example shown in FIG. 74 (b), since the small winning combination 3b was not won by performing a stop operation not following the operation navigation in the game G71, the display of the number of remaining games in the final game preview image d150 of the next game changes. Not. Similarly, in the game G73 as well, since the small winning combination 3b was not won by performing the stop operation not following the operation navigation, the display of the number of remaining games in the final game preview image d150 of the next game has not changed. As described above, in this modification, the number of remaining games of the final game preview image d150 of the next game is not changed for the game in which the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation, and the final game preview image d150 of the previous game is used as it is. I am trying to display it. That is, in this modified example, after the final game preview image d150 is started, the game that has been stopped according to the operation navigation is not targeted for the remaining games in the AT state, and the AT state is extended for that game. ing.

After starting the final game preview image d150, a game that has been stopped according to the operation navigation may be targeted for the remaining games in the AT state, and that game may be included in the number of remaining games. Since the player is looking at the final game preview image d150, it may be possible to end the AT state without discomfort by ending it early. Further, in this case, in the game before starting the final game preview image d150, the game in which the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation is not targeted for the remaining games in the AT state, and after the final game preview image d150 is started. In the above game, it is preferable that the remaining game in the AT state is targeted only for the game in which the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation.

In addition, the game state of the AT system of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 74 did not include the AT state (ending). However, it may be configured to include an AT state (ending). In this case, the AT state (ending) is performed in the case where 1000 games are exhausted in the privilege period and the case where the cumulative number of medals acquired (MY) in the privilege period is 2000 or more, and in the AT state (ending). The ending production shall be performed. The ending effect is different from the ending effect performed when 1000 games are exhausted in the privilege period and the ending effect performed when the cumulative number of medals acquired (MY) in the privilege period is 2000 or more. It is easy to recognize in which case the ending effect is performed. Further, when one ending effect is performed, it is preferable to continue one effect without starting the other ending effect even if the start condition of the other ending effect is satisfied. The ending effect being executed can be shown to the player until the end.

Further, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 74, a condition regarding MY is added as a limiter for the privilege period. However, conditions other than MY may be used. For example, a condition may be added as a limiter, which ends when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number, and ends when the number of winnings of a predetermined combination reaches a predetermined number.

Further, the period of the AT state may be either a fixed period (for example, 50 games) or a variable period (for example, an AT state of 50 games plus an additional AT game of 20 games). In the fixed AT state period, or in the case of the variable AT state, in the initial AT state period, when comparing the first AT state of the privilege period and the second and subsequent AT states, the first AT state is better. The period may be longer than the AT state after the second time. Even in the AT state, it may not be possible to give a bad impression that many medals cannot be won.

Further, the expectation degree of the next expected state (expected degree of transition to the AT state) to be started after the end of the AT state may be determined based on the result of the game progress in the AT state. For example, a lottery process may be performed for each game in the AT state to determine the degree of expectation in the expected state. As the period of the AT state becomes longer, the degree of expectation of the next expected state can be increased. According to this configuration, when the first AT state is longer than the second and subsequent AT states, by starting the first AT game, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for the execution of the second and subsequent AT games. If it is possible to make a change that lengthens the period during the AT state, it may be expected that the AT game will be executed next time if there is even one change that lengthens the period.

Further, the AT state may be divided into a plurality of parts (parts). For example, the AT state may be divided into a first half part and a second half part. In this case, the first half portion may be a period in which the number of games is fixed (for example, 5 games are fixed), and in the first half portion, the first half portion effect that can be grasped as the first half portion of the AT state may be executed. .. On the other hand, in the latter half, the number of games is variable (for example, variable in 5 games or more), and in the first half, the latter half effect that can be grasped as the latter half of the AT state is executed. Good. This makes it easy to grasp the progress until the end of the AT state. In addition, the first half gives a sense of security that the game will continue, and the second half gives a sense of expectation that the game will continue for a long time, giving a different impression in one state.

Further, when the AT state is divided into the first half portion and the second half portion, it is preferable that the period of the first half portion is shorter than the period of the second half portion. In this case, the expectation that the game will continue for a long time may be further increased. On the other hand, on the contrary, the period of the first half may be longer than the period of the second half. In this case, the sense of security that the game continues may be further enhanced.

Further, when the AT state is divided into the first half portion and the second half portion, the first half portion production may be a continuous story production. For example, in the first half of the first AT state of the privilege period, the first episode of the story production is executed, and in the first half of the second AT state of the privilege period, the second episode of the story production is executed, and the privilege period In the first half of the third AT state, the third episode of the story production may be executed. That is, the story production may be executed according to the number of times the AT state is executed during the privilege period. When the final story of the story production is executed, it is preferable that the privilege period ends and the normal period starts with the AT game. According to this, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the privilege period.

When the AT state is divided into the first half part and the second half part, regarding the period of the first half part of the AT state, the period of the first half part of the first AT state in the privilege period is the first half of the second and subsequent AT states in the privilege period. It is preferable that the period is longer than the partial period. In this case, it may be possible to give the impression that many medals can be obtained if the AT state can be started. On the other hand, the period of the first half of the first AT state in the privilege period may be shorter than the period of the second and subsequent AT states in the privilege period. In this case, it may be possible to give the impression that many medals can be obtained if the AT state after the second time can be started.

Further, when the AT state is divided into the first half portion and the second half portion, the latter half portion of the AT state may be further divided into the first half portion and the second half portion. In this case, the first half of the latter half of the AT state is a period in which the number of games is fixed (for example, 10 games are fixed), and the first half of the second half can be grasped as the first half of the second half of the AT state. The second half part and the first half part may be performed. On the other hand, in the latter half of the latter half of the AT state, the number of games is a variable period (for example, it is variable in 0 games or more), and in the latter half of the latter half, it is possible to grasp that it is the latter half of the latter half. The second half of the partial production may be executed. When the number of games is variable, at least one of the plurality of types of variable games is set to a period (for example, 20 games) that exceeds the period of the first half of the latter half (for example, fixed at 10 games). May be good. It may be possible to raise the expectations of the player.

Further, regarding the period of the expected state, the length of the period of the expected state may be determined without depending on the length of the period of the immediately preceding AT state. For example, if 10 games are uniformly determined at the start of the expected state and then the condition for extending the period is satisfied, the period of the expected state may be extended regardless of the length of the period of the immediately preceding AT state. .. It becomes easier to predict how much the medals obtained in the last AT state will decrease.

<< Embodiment to execute revival effect at the end of AT state >>
[7th Embodiment]
The seventh embodiment is an embodiment in which a new playability is realized by devising a revival effect executed at the end of the AT state.

In the AT state, there is a high degree of freedom in setting the length of the period. Therefore, there is a game machine that produces an effect as if the AT state has ended once, and then produces an effect in which there is a remaining game in the AT state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161399).

However, such an effect is patterned, and the effect is less interesting.

The game console of the present embodiment is a game console that can provide an interesting effect at the end of the AT state.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 2100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 2100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line.

The slot machine 2100 shown in FIG. 75 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 2101 and a front door 2102 that is attached to the front of the main body 2101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 2101. .. Inside the center of the main body 2101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 2110, middle reel 2111, right reel 2112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 2100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 210 to 2112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 211 to 2112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 211 to 2112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 2113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

More specifically with reference to FIG. 76, the symbols displayed in the upper stage of the left reel 2110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) are the upper design of the left reel and the middle stage of the left reel 2110 (shown in the figure). The symbol displayed at position 2 (also referred to as symbol position 2) is the symbol in the middle of the left reel, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the left reel 2110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is the symbol in the lower left reel. , The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 2111 (position 4 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 4) is the upper stage symbol of the middle reel, and the middle stage of the middle reel 2111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5). The symbol displayed in is the middle reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed in the middle reel 2111 lower (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is the middle reel lower symbol, the right reel 2112 upper (shown in the figure). The symbol displayed at position 7; also referred to as symbol position 7) is the upper symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed at the middle of the right reel 2112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8) is the middle symbol on the right reel. , The symbols displayed in the lower row of the right reel 2112 (position 9 shown in the figure; also referred to as the symbol position 9) are called the lower symbols of the right reel, respectively, and each symbol of each reel 210 to 2112 is passed through the symbol display window 2113. A total of nine are displayed on the reels 210 to 2112, three in the vertical direction. Then, by rotating each reel 211 to 2112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 211 to 2112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols.

As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 2100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 210 to 2112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 2113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 2100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 210 to 2112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 211 to 2112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

In the present embodiment, the middle winning line L1 composed of the left reel middle symbol, the middle reel middle symbol and the right reel middle symbol, the left reel upper symbol, the middle reel middle symbol and the right reel lower symbol L2 , Left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, right-up winning line L3, left reel lower symbol, middle reel lower symbol, right reel lower symbol, lower winning line L4, 4 Two winning lines 2114 are provided. FIG. 2 shows these winning lines. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. The slot machine 2100 of the present embodiment is a dedicated machine for betting three medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than three, no winning line is valid, and when three medals are bet, all winning lines L1 ~ L4 becomes valid. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 2135 can be operated to start the game. The number of winning lines is not limited to four. For example, three lines of the middle-stage winning line L1, the downward-sloping winning line L2, and the upward-sloping winning line L3 may be set as valid winning lines, and the number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as the valid winning lines. You may.

The winning line indicator lamp 2120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 2114.

The BB medium lamp 2123 is a lamp that informs the player that a bonus game is in progress. In the present embodiment, the lights are turned on from the start to the end of the bonus game (while the RT system game state described later is in RT3 (special game state)). The game medal insertable lamp 2124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 2122 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no medal insertion is required) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 2128 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons (bet buttons) 2130 to 2132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 2100. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 2130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 2131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 2132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 2132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 2129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 2121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 2141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 2130 to 2132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 2141, and the insertion means that both are included. is there.

The stored number display 2125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 2100. The game information display 2126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 2127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 2125, the game information display 2126, and the payout number display 2127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 2127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 2137 to 2139).

The start lever 2135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 211 to 2112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 2141 or the bet buttons 2130 to 2132 are operated to operate the start lever 2135, the reels 210 to 2112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 2135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 2136 is provided with stop buttons 2137 to 2139. The stop buttons 2137 to 2139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 210 to 2112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 2135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 210 to 2112. .. More specifically, the left reel 2110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 2137, the middle reel 2111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 2138, and the right stop button 2139 can be pressed. The right reel 2112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 2137 to 2139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel to be operated to a second stop may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel to be operated to a third stop may be referred to as a third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 2137 to 2139 for stopping all the rotating reels 210 to 2112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 2110 and the stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 2112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 2137 to 2139, and when the stop buttons 2137 to 2139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The effect button 2171 is a button provided to execute a predetermined effect. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 2171 is operated while the revival effect 2 is being executed, the result of the revival effect 2 is notified (details will be described later).

The medal return button 2133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 2134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 2100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 2155. The door key hole 2140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 2102 of the slot machine 2100. The medal payout outlet 2155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 2136, a title panel 2162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. A medal payout outlet 2155 and a medal tray 2161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 2162.

The sound hole 2181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 2100 to the outside. The side lamps 2144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 2160 is provided on the upper part of the front door 2102, and a sound hole 2143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 2160. The effect device 2160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 2163 composed of two right shutters 2163a and a left shutter 2163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 2157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 2163. When the right shutter 2163a and the left shutter 2163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 2157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 2157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 2100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 2157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 2137 to 2139).

In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 2100 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 2100 are roughly classified into main control units 2300 that control the progress of the game and main effects according to command signals (hereinafter, simply referred to as "commands") transmitted by the main control units 2300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 2400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 2500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 2400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 2300 of the slot machine 2100 will be described. The main control unit 2300 includes a basic circuit 2302 that controls the entire main control unit 2300, and the basic circuit 2302 includes a CPU 2304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of internal lottery of a winning combination, and reel stop. ROM 2306 for storing positions, RAM 2308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 2310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 2312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 2314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 2306 and the RAM 2308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 2400 and the second sub-control unit 2500, which will be described later. The CPU 2304 of the basic circuit 2302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 2315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 2304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 2306 to the counter timer 2312, and the counter timer 2312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 2304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 2304 uses this interrupt request as an opportunity to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 2315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 2300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 2316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 2315a. A start signal output circuit 2338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 2304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 2338 (main process of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 2300 includes a sensor circuit 2320, and the CPU 2304 is inserted from various sensors 2318 (bet button 2130 sensor, bet button 2131 sensor, bet button 2132 sensor, medal insertion slot 2141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 2135 sensor, stop button 2137 sensor, stop button 2138 sensor, stop button 2139 sensor, settlement button 2134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout from medal payout device 2180, index sensor for reel 2110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 2111, the index sensor of the reel 2112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 2320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 2316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 2316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 2141 to detect the presence or absence of passing medals. Two start lever 2135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 2135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 2137 sensor, the stop button 2138 sensor, and the stop button 2139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 2137 to 2139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 2130 sensor, the bet button 2131 sensor, and the bet button 2132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 2130 to 2132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 2308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the closing operation of the case. The checkout button 2134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 2134. When the checkout button 2134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 2180. The above sensors may be non-contact type sensors or contact type sensors.

The index sensor of the reel 2110, the index sensor of the reel 2111, and the index sensor of the reel 2112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 211 to 2112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes, L Become a level. When the CPU 2304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 2300 is provided in the drive circuit 2322 for driving the stepping motor provided on the reels 211 to 2112, the drive circuit 2324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 2170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 2180. Drive circuit 2326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 2336 (winning line display lamp 2120, game medal insertable lamp 2124, re-game lamp 2122, game medal insertion lamp 2129, game start lamp 2121, stored number display 2125, game information A drive circuit 2328 for driving the display 2126, the payout number display 2127, the BB middle lamp 2123, the advantage lamp 2190, and the auxiliary signal lamp 2191) is provided.

An information output circuit 2334 is connected to the basic circuit 2302, and the main control unit 2300 is slotted in an information input circuit 2652 provided by an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 2334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 2100 is output. Further, the main control unit 2300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 2330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 2300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 2330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage is less than 9v) is output to the basic circuit 2302.

Further, the main control unit 2300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 2400, and can communicate with the first sub control unit 2400. Information communication between the main control unit 2300 and the first sub control unit 2400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 2300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 2400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 2400 to the main control unit 2300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 2400 of the slot machine 2100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 2400 includes a basic circuit 2402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 2300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 2400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 2402 is equipped with a CPU 2404, a RAM 2408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 2410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 2412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 2402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 2414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 2400 stores a ROM 2406 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 2400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like. It is provided.

The CPU 2404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 2406 to the counter timer 2412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 2412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 2404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 2404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 2418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 2400, and speakers 2272 and 2277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 2418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 2272 and 2277 in response to a command from the CPU 2404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 2418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 2272 and 2277.

The first sub-control unit 2400 is also provided with a drive circuit 2422, and the drive circuit 2422 is provided with various lamps 2420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 2144, title panel 2162 lamp, etc.) via an input / output interface. It is connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 2400 is provided with a drive circuit 2424 for driving the shutter 2163, and the shutter 2163 is connected to the drive circuit 2424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 2424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 2163 in response to a command from the CPU 2404.

Further, a sensor circuit 2426 is provided in the first sub control unit 2400, and various sensors 2428 (shutter 2163 sensor, effect button 2171 sensor, etc.) are connected to the sensor circuit 2426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the status of various sensors 2428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 2404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 2500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 2500 of the slot machine 2100 controls the liquid crystal display device 2157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 2500 of the slot machine 2100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 2500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 2400 via the input interface, and uses the basic circuit 2502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 2500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 2502 includes a CPU 2504, a RAM 2508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 2510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 2512. The CPU 2504 of the basic circuit 2502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 2514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 2500 is provided with a ROM 2506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 2500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 2504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 2506 to the counter timer 2512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 2512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 2504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 2504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP2516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 2500, and a ROM 2506 and a VRAM 2518 are connected to the VDP2516 via a bus. The VDP2516 reads the image data or the like stored in the ROM 2506 based on the signal from the CPU 2504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 2518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 2157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above reels 210 to 2112 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 2110, middle reel 2111, right reel 2112) in a planar development.

On each reel 210 to 2112, a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in the present embodiment) of a plurality of types (10 types in the present embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 211 to 2112. For example, in the present embodiment, the number 0 frame of the left reel 2110 is "bell symbol", the number 2 frame of the middle reel 2111 is "seven 1 symbol", and the number 1 frame of the right reel 2112 is "replay". "Designs" are arranged respectively.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 2100 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. It should be noted that the figure shows the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination, and the number of winning combinations given (the number of medals paid out).

The winning combination of the slot machine 2100 includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2, special role 3) and a general role (replaying role, small role 1 to small role 3). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special role (special role 1, special role 2 and special role 3) is a role of shifting to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. In addition, the replay role is a role that enables replay without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations are sometimes referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the effective line. For example, the special combination 1, Includes winnings for special role 2, special role 3 and replaying role.

The special role 1, the special role 2 and the special role 3 are the roles (acting roles) that shift to the special gaming state by winning a prize. However, no medals will be paid out for winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combinations are "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1 (BB1)" for special role 1, "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2 (BB2)" for special role 2, and "BAR-BAR" for special role 3. -BAR (RB) ".

When the special combination 1, the special combination 2 or the special combination 3 is internally elected, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 2308 of the main control unit 2300). ). When this flag is set to ON, the main control unit 2300 shifts the gaming state to the special combination internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT1). This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1, the special role 2 or the special role 3 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role will be obtained. (For example, if the special role 1 is internally won, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1 (BB1)" is used, and if the special role 2 is internally won, "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2 (BB2)". , And if the special combination 3 is internally won, the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR (RB)” symbols) will be in a state where it is easy to win a prize. This special role internal winning state (RT1) will be described later.

The main control unit 2300 sets the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, the special combination 2 or the special combination 3. Migrate.

The re-game combination is a winning combination (operating role) that allows the player to play the game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize, and the medal is not paid out. The symbol combination corresponding to the replay role (replay) is "replay-replay-replay".

The small role (small role 1 to small role 3) is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combinations are as follows: small role 1 is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon (watermelon)", small role 2 Is "cherry-ANY-ANY (cherry)", and small role 3 is "bell-bell-bell (bell)". The corresponding payout number is as shown in the figure. In the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol of the left reel 2110 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the middle reel 2111 and the right reel 2112 may be any symbol.

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each combination is the numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each combination, and the numerical data of the range of random values acquired at the time of the internal lottery described later (65536 in this embodiment). It is calculated by dividing by. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination or loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. Actually, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one combination, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. ..

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming states of the slot machine 2100 will be described. FIG. 80 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 2300 of the slot machine 2100.

As shown in FIG. 80A, the main control unit 2300 of the slot machine 2100 has a normal gaming state (RT0), a special winning combination internal winning state (RT1), and a special gaming state (RT2). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-type gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to a so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter, referred to as an AT-type game state). As shown in FIG. 80B, the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 has two gaming states, a normal state and an AT state, at RT0.

<Normal game state (RT0)>
The content of the normal game state (RT0) is not particularly limited, but for example, the total number of medals that can be obtained during the game when the result of the internal lottery is generally lost and the player plays the game for a predetermined period is during the game. A game state in which the total number of medals inserted is less than the total number of medals inserted.

The normal game state (RT0) is started when the special game state (RT2) ends in addition to the initial state. Further, in the normal game state (RT0), when any of the special combination 1, 2 or 3 is internally won, the state shifts to the special combination internal winning state (RT1).

<Special role internal winning state (RT1)>
The special combination internal winning state (RT1) refers to a gaming state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the internally winning special combination can be displayed on the effective line.

This special winning combination internal winning state (RT1) is started when any of the special winning combination 1, 2 or 3 is internally won in the normal gaming state (RT0). Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination 1, 2 or 3 is displayed on the effective line, the game ends and the game shifts to the special game state (RT2).

<Special game state (RT2)>
The special gaming state (RT2) is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player among all the gaming states. The special game state (RT2) is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the internally won special combination is displayed on the valid line in the special combination internal winning state (RT1). Further, the special game state (RT2) ends when a predetermined number of games (15 games in the present embodiment) are exhausted, and the game shifts to the normal game state (RT0).

<AT game state>
The AT state refers to a game state in which an effect of notifying a stop operation method (operation timing or operation order of stop operation) is executed so as to bring an advantageous result to the player. In the AT state of the present embodiment, when the small winning combination is internally won in the normal gaming state (RT0), a stop operation (for example, for example,) for winning the internally winning small winning combination using the image of the effect image display device 2157 is used. Executes a stop operation notification effect that notifies (such as a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination). On the other hand, the normal state is an initial state in which the slot machine 2100 first shifts after the power is turned on or reset, and the above-described stop operation notification effect is not executed.

In the present embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state (RT0), 30 games (initial number of games) are given as the number of AT games, and the AT state (RT0) is started from the next game. Then, in the AT state (RT0), when the number of given AT games is exhausted, the normal state is entered.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the AT addition lottery is won in the AT state (RT0), a predetermined number of AT games are added (added). In the present embodiment, even if the additional lottery is won during the period of the initial number of games and the number of additional AT games exists, whether the AT state ends or continues at the end of the initial number of AT states is determined. It is designed to execute the series of effects shown. That is, when the AT additional lottery is won, the notification that the AT additional lottery has been won is not executed.

<Direction at the end of the initial number of games in the AT state>
FIG. 81 is a time chart diagram showing the flow of the effect at the end of the initial number of games (30 games) in the AT state. Further, FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the types of effects that appear at the end of the initial number of games in the AT state.

There are four effects at the end of the initial number of games in the AT state: (1) end effect 1, (2) revival effect 1, (3) end effect 2, and (4) revival effect 2. The end effects 1 and 2 are effects that suggest the end of the AT state. For example, the end character is displayed, and the number of acquired cards and the number of games in the AT state are displayed. The revival effects 1 and 2 are effects that suggest the possibility that the AT state, which seems to have ended once, will continue. For example, it may be an effect in which the main character and an enemy character fight, or an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 2171. Then, as the ending of the resurrection effects 1 and 2, either the effect indicating that the AT state continues or the effect indicating that the AT state ends is executed. For example, if the main character wins, the number of additional AT games is displayed along with the winning character to indicate that the AT state continues, or if the main character is defeated, the defeated character is displayed and AT Indicates that the state is ending. In addition, the number of additional AT games is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 2171 to indicate that the AT state continues, or a character such as disappointment is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 2171 to end the AT state. Show that.

In the present embodiment, first, at the end of the initial number of games in the AT state, the end effect 1 suggesting the end of the AT state is executed. In the end effect 1, the end display 1 (denoted as d210 in the drawing; a specific display image will be described later) is displayed on the effect image display device 2157. That is, the end effect 1 is executed in the 30th game (denoted as the Gn game) in the AT state, and the end display 1 is displayed.

In the present embodiment, next, when the 31st game in the AT state (denoted as the Gn + 1th game) is reached, the resurrection effect 1 suggesting the possibility that the AT state that seems to have ended once continues is executed. In the revival effect 1, the revival display 1 (denoted as d220 in the drawing; a specific display image will be described later) is displayed on the effect image display device 2157. This revival effect 1 is a story effect that progresses according to the game operation of the Gn + 1 game, and finally, the revival display 1-a (denoted as d220A on the drawing; a concrete display image) suggesting the continuation of the AT state. Will be described later), or a resurrection display 1-b (denoted as d220B on the drawing; a specific display image will be described later) indicating the end of the AT state is displayed. When the resurrection display 1-a is displayed, the AT state is started from the next game.

On the other hand, when the resurrection display 1-b is displayed, the resurrection effect 2 may be executed thereafter. More specifically, there are cases where the resurrection display 1 is displayed and then the process ends without displaying the resurrection display 2, and cases where the resurrection display 1 is displayed and then the resurrection display 2 is displayed. That is, even if the resurrection display 1-b is displayed, the normal state is not always started from the next game. In the resurrection effect 2, the effect image display device 2157 displays the resurrection display 2 (denoted as d230 in the drawing; a specific display image will be described later). Specifically, when the resurrection display 1-b is displayed, the resurrection display 2 is displayed while displaying the resurrection display 1-b on the effect image display device 2157. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a period in which the period for executing the resurrection effect 1 and the period for executing the resurrection effect 2 overlap.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81, only the resurrection display 2 is displayed on the effect image display device 2157, and the resurrection display 2-a (indicated as d230A in the drawing) suggesting the continuation of the AT state as the game progresses; A typical display image will be described later), or a resurrection display 2-b (denoted as d230B in the drawing; a specific display image will be described later) indicating the end of the AT state is displayed. When the resurrection display 2-a or the resurrection display 2-b is displayed, the end effect 2 is executed thereafter. In the end effect 2, the end display 2 (denoted as d240 in the drawing; a specific display image will be described later) is displayed on the effect image display device 2157. That is, the end effect 2 is executed in the 31st game (denoted as Gn game + 1st) in the AT state, and the end display 2 is displayed.

Specifically, when the resurrection display 2-a is displayed, the end display 2 is displayed together with the resurrection display 2-a, and the AT state is started from the next game. On the other hand, when the resurrection display 2-b is displayed, the end display 2 is displayed together with the resurrection display 2-b, and the normal state is started from the next game.

It should be noted that the resurrection display 1-a or the resurrection display 2-a is displayed when, as a matter of course, the AT addition lottery is won during the period of the initial number of games in the AT state, and the number of additional games is given. .. That is, it is a case where the number of additional games is determined between the start of the AT state and the execution of the end effect 1, but the effect of notifying the player of the number of games is not executed. On the other hand, the resurrection display 2-b is displayed when the AT additional game number is not won and the additional game number is not given during the period of the initial number of games in the AT state. Further, when the resurrection display 1-b is displayed, both the resurrection display 2-a and 2-b are displayed thereafter, so that the AT addition lottery is won in the initial game in the AT state, and the number of additional games is displayed. Is given, and there is a case where the AT additional game is not won in the initial game in the AT state and the number of additional games is not given.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the revival effect may be executed in two steps instead of ending the revival effect once, so that the player's disappointment is reduced and the expectation is improved again. You may be able to.

FIG. 83 is a time chart diagram showing the flow of the effect shown in FIG. 81 in more detail by adding the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 2171 by the player. Specifically, the revival effect 2 of the present embodiment is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 2171 (the display image will be described later), so that the effect content is actually based on the operation of the effect button 2171. It's changing. That is, the trigger for branching of the resurrection display 2-a or the resurrection display 2-b shown in FIG. 81 is an operation on the effect button 2171. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect button 2171 is operated while the resurrection display 2 is displayed, the resurrection display 2-a or the resurrection display 2-b is displayed.

On the other hand, even if the resurrection display 2 prompting the operation of the effect button 2171 is displayed, if the operation for the effect button 2171 is not performed, the resurrection display 2 is continuously displayed, and then the resurrection display 2 is displayed together with the end display 2. To do. That is, in this case, since the resurrection display 2-a or the resurrection display 2-b is not displayed, the player cannot grasp whether or not the AT state continues until the next game is started. The display of the revival display 2 is also deleted at the timing of erasing the display of the end display 2.

In the present embodiment, when the resurrection display 1-a is displayed, the end effect 2 is not executed (not via the end display 2), and the AT state effect is executed. In this case, since the continuation of the AT state is notified at an early timing, it is possible to easily recognize that the AT state has been continued with the opportunity of the next chance. In addition, when the resurrection display 1-b is displayed and the number of additional games is not given, the AT state is terminated without displaying the resurrection display 2 (without executing the end effect 2), and the normal state is changed. You may start. Expectations can be increased when the resurrection display 2 is displayed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the resurrection display 2-a is displayed, the end effect 2 is executed. This is because the player can be made to recognize that this was the last chance by performing the end display 2.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an effect mode of the effect executed at the end of the initial number of games in the AT state in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 84A, the end display 1 displays the number of acquired cards and the number of games in the AT state together with the end character. Further, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), the resurrection display 1 displays an image in which the main character and the enemy character fight, and the resurrection display 1-a shows the winning character and AT together with the image in which the main character wins. The characters of AT30G indicating the number of additional games are displayed, and the resurrection display 1-b displays the characters of defeat together with the image in which the main character is defeated. The image means a part of a moving image, and the display of each effect is composed of a moving image (movie).

As shown in FIG. 84A, the resurrection display 2 displays an image prompting the operation of the operation button 2171 (for example, an image of the operation button, an arrow image toward the operation button, and a character image of the press). As shown in FIG. 84 (b), the resurrection display 2-a displays a character (for example, + 30G) indicating the number of AT-added games, and the resurrection display 2-b is as shown in FIG. 84 (b). , A character (for example, unfortunate) indicating that there was no AT additional game is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 84 (b), the end display 2 displays the end character to notify the end of the AT state.

Here, the resurrection display 1-b is an image that gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 84 (a), and is an image that is finally completely erased (described in FIG. 85 described later). ). If there is no operation for the effect button 2171 while the resurrection display 2 is being displayed, the resurrection display 2 is continuously displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (c), and then the end display is displayed in addition to the resurrection display 2. 2 is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the end of acceptance of the operation for the effect button 2171 is approaching. Here, if the AT addition lottery is won during the initial number of games in the AT state and the number of AT addition games is given, the AT indicating the AT state is shown together with the start of the Gn + 2nd game (Gn + 2nd game insertion operation). The background image d250 is displayed. That is, even if the number of AT added games is given, since there is no operation on the effect button 2171, the opportunity to notify the number of AT added games is not given. On the other hand, if the AT addition lottery is not won during the initial number of games in the AT state and the number of AT addition games is not given, the normal state is shown together with the start of the Gn + 2nd game (Gn + 2nd game insertion operation). The normal background image d260 is displayed.

The "AT state *" shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b) means the AT background image d250 shown in FIG. 84 (c), and the "normal state *" shown in FIG. 84 (b) is , Means the normal background image d260 shown in FIG. 84 (c).

FIG. 85 is a time chart diagram illustrating the overlapping period of the resurrection display 1 and the resurrection display 2. Note that FIG. 85 shows a case where the effect button 2171 is not operated.

The resurrection display 1-b starts displaying based on the winning determination of the Gn + 1 game. Specifically, it is displayed from the time t1 of the winning determination of the Gn + 1 game to the time t3 when the operation of the effect button 2171 can be accepted. As described above, since the image of the resurrection display 1-b is an image that is gradually erased, at the time point t3, the image of the resurrection display 1-b is completely erased.

The resurrection display 2 is displayed from the time point t2 when a predetermined time TA (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the time point t1. Specifically, from the time t2 of the Gn + 1 game, (1) when the operation for the effect button 2171 is performed, (2) the operation for the effect button 2171 is performed until the operation for the effect button 2171 is performed. If not, it is displayed up to t5 at the time of the input operation of Gn + 2nd game.

It is from time point t3 that the operation reception for the effect button 2171 becomes possible. That is, the revival display 2 prompting the operation of the effect button 2171 is displayed from the time point t2, but the operation reception for the effect button 2171 is possible from the subsequent time point t3. Even if the effect button 2171 is operated between the time point t2 and the time point t3, the operation is not accepted. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation for the effect button 2171 is accepted after the resurrection display 1-b is completely erased. As a result, after showing all the stories of the resurrection display 1-b, the operation for the production button 2171 is accepted, so that the player can expect the next production without worrying that he may have overlooked an important announcement. Can be done.

The operation of the effect button 2171 is accepted between the time point t2 and the time point t3, but this period may be a period in which the effect is not executed by the operation acceptance, and the effect may be executed by receiving the operation of the effect button 2171 after the time point t3. .. As described above, the purpose of showing all the stories of the resurrection display 1-b can be achieved.

The display of the end display 2 starts from the time t4 when the predetermined time TB (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the time t1 in the Gn + 1 game.

From the above, in the present embodiment, the display of the resurrection display 1-b and the resurrection display 2 overlaps from the time point t2 to the time point t3.

FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating continuous production executed in the Gn game in the AT state (specifically, the 30th game in the AT state) and the Gn + 1 game (specifically, the 31st game in the AT state). Is. This continuous effect is a continuous effect over two games, and as shown in FIG. 86 (a), it includes four types of continuous effects.

In the continuous effect 1, the effect A1 is executed in the first game (Gn game in the AT state), and the effect A2 is executed in the second game (Gn + 1 game in the AT state). Similarly, the continuous effect 2 executes the effect A1 in the first game (Gn game in the AT state), executes the effect A3 in the second game (Gn + 1 game in the AT state), and continuously produces the effect 3. Executes the effect A1 in the first game (Gn game in the AT state), executes the effect A4 in the second game (Gn + 1 game in the AT state), and the continuous effect 4 is the first game (AT). In the Gn game in the state), the effect A1 is executed, and in the second game (Gn + 1 game in the AT state), the effect A5 is executed.

FIG. 86B is a diagram schematically showing a scenario of each effect constituting a continuous effect, and FIG. 87 is a table showing the contents of each effect data assigned to the game operation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the effect A1 is a scenario in which the effect A-1 is executed at the time of winning determination, and the effect A-1 displays the end display 1 as shown in FIG. 87. It is a production to do.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the effect A2 is a start operation, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, a third stop operation, a winning determination, and a next game input operation. Occasionally, the effect A-2, the effect A-3, the effect A-4, the effect A-5, the effect A-9, and the effect A-11 are executed, respectively. As shown in FIG. 87, the productions A-2 to A5 are productions for displaying the resurrection display 1, and are productions for a duel scene between the main character and the enemy character. The effect A-9 is an effect of displaying the resurrection display 1-a, displays the victory in the duel scene, and displays the number of games added to the AT. The effect A-11 is an effect that displays the start of the AT state.

Therefore, the continuous effect 1 is an effect indicating that the AT state continues in the first revival effect.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 86B, the effect A3 is a start operation, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, a third stop operation, a winning determination, and a next game input operation. Occasionally, the effect A-2, the effect A-3, the effect A-4, the effect A-5, the effect A-10, and the effect A-12 are executed, respectively. The effect A-10 is an effect of displaying the end display 2 while displaying the defeat in the duel scene. The effect A-12 is an effect that displays the start of the normal state.

Therefore, the continuous effect 2 is an effect indicating that the normal state is entered in the first revival effect.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 86B, the effect A4 includes a start operation, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, a third stop operation, a winning determination, an effect button operation, and the next. At the start operation of the game, the effect A-2, the effect A-3, the effect A-4, the effect A-5, the effect A-6, the A-7, and the effect A-11 are executed, respectively. As shown in FIG. 87, the effect A-6 is an effect of displaying the resurrection display 1-b, displaying the resurrection display 2, and further displaying the end display 2. As shown in FIG. 87, the effect A-7 is an effect of displaying the resurrection display 2-a and displaying the end display 2.

Therefore, the continuous effect 3 displays a display suggesting the end of the AT state in the first resurrection effect, but thereafter indicates that the second resurrection effect is executed and the AT state continues in the second resurrection effect. It is a production.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 86B, the effect A5 includes a start operation, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, a third stop operation, a winning determination, an effect button operation, and the next. At the start operation of the game, the effect A-2, the effect A-3, the effect A-4, the effect A-5, the effect A-6, the A-8, and the effect A-12 are executed, respectively. As shown in FIG. 87, the effect A-8 is an effect of displaying the resurrection display 2-b and displaying the end display 2.

Therefore, in the continuous effect 4, the second revival effect is executed after the display suggesting the end of the AT state in the first revival effect, but the end of the AT state is also suggested in the second revival effect. It is an effect that displays and indicates that the normal state is entered.

As described above, the continuous production of the present embodiment is a privilege-giving effect for notifying whether or not to grant the privilege of the AT addition game. ..

FIG. 88 is a time chart diagram for explaining the display timing of the end display 2 in comparison with the operation timing for the effect button 2171. Note that FIG. 88 shows a case where the revival display 2-a indicating the continuation of the AT state is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 2171.

FIG. 88A shows the display timing of the end display 2 when the effect button 2171 is operated before a predetermined time TB (3 seconds in this embodiment) elapses from t1 at the time of winning determination in the Gn + 1 game in the AT state. FIG. 88B shows the display timing of the end display 2 when the effect button 2171 is operated after a predetermined time TB (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from t1 at the time of winning determination in the Gn + 1 game in the AT state. Is shown.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the effect button 2171 is operated at a relatively early timing after the resurrection display 2 is displayed, first, when the operation for the effect button 2171 is performed, the next game starts from t3. The revival display 2-a is displayed up to the medal insertion time t5, and then the end display 2 is displayed from the time t4 when the predetermined time TB has elapsed from the winning determination t1 to the medal insertion time t5 of the next game. That is, the end display 2 overlaps with the resurrection display 2-a from the time point t4 to the time point t5.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88B, when the effect button 2171 is operated at a relatively late timing after the resurrection display 2 is displayed, first, when a predetermined time TB has elapsed from t1 at the time of winning determination. The end display 2 is displayed from t4 to t5 when the medal of the next game is inserted. Next, the resurrection display 2-a is displayed from the time t3 when the operation to the effect button 2171 is performed to the time t5 when the medal is inserted in the next game. That is, the end display 2 overlaps the resurrection display from the time point t4 to the time point t3, and overlaps with the resurrection display 2-a from the time point t3 to the time point t5.

FIG. 89A is a diagram illustrating the number of additional games given in the AT additional lottery. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 executes each game and the AT addition lottery in the AT state, and when the AT addition lottery is won, any one of the number of AT addition games shown in FIG. 89A. One is to be selected. That is, when the AT addition lottery is won, any one of 10 games, 20 games, 30 games, 40 games, and 50 games is selected.

FIG. 89B is a schematic diagram showing a mechanism for determining which continuous effect is to be executed at the end of the initial number of games in the AT state. In the present embodiment, at the end of the initial number of games in the AT state (to be exact, at the time of the AT provisional end game; details will be described later), the total number of AT additional games given during the initial number of games in the AT state. It is determined whether to execute the continuous effect 1 or 3 based on the value.

Here, the continuous effects 1 and 3 are both effects indicating the continuation of the AT state. Further, the total value of the number of AT additional games is, for example, 10 games in the first AT additional lottery and 20 games in the second AT additional lottery by winning the AT additional lottery twice during the initial number of games in the AT state. If a game is given, the total value will be 30 games.

If the AT addition lottery is not won during the initial number of games in the AT state and the number of AT addition games given is 0, either continuous production 2 or 4 is executed based on the production lottery table (not shown). Decide if you want to. Here, the continuous effects 2 and 4 are both effects indicating the end of the AT state.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89B, when the total value of the number of AT added games is less than 50, the continuous effect 1 is executed with a probability of 20%, and the continuous effect 2 is executed with a probability of 80%. On the other hand, when the total value of the number of AT added games is 50 or more, the continuous effect 1 is executed with a probability of 80%, and the continuous effect 2 is executed with a probability of 20%. That is, in the present embodiment, the larger the number of AT additional games given (specifically, if it is larger than 50), the higher the probability of notifying the continuation of the AT state in the first resurrection effect, the resurrection effect 1. As the number of AT-added games is smaller (specifically, if it is smaller than 50), the probability of notifying the continuation of the AT state in the second resurrection effect 2, that is, is higher. That is, the probability that a large number of AT-added games is notified in the first revival effect and a small number of AT-added games are notified in the second revival effect is high.

If the playability is such that the chances of obtaining a small amount of extras are greater than the chances of obtaining a large amount of extras, the frequency of notification to the latter is higher than the frequency of notification to the former. Therefore, when trying to raise the expectation that the second resurrection effect will be performed, it is preferable to increase the probability of notifying a small number of AT additional games in the second resurrection effect.

The opposite, that is, the probability that a small number of AT-added games is notified in the first revival effect and a large number of AT-added games may be notified in the second revival effect may be increased. Expectations for the second revival production can be further improved. Although the frequency of the second revival production is low, it can be impressed that if it is executed, it will be a production that can be expected to add a lot of AT.

<Operation of slot machine>
Hereinafter, processing of the main control unit 2300, the first sub control unit 2400, and the second sub control unit 2500 reflecting the above characteristics will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 2304 of the main control unit 2300 will be described with reference to FIG. 90. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 2300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 2332 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 2304 of the basic circuit 2302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 90 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 2306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S801. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 2304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 2310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 2308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 2314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S802, the game start process is executed. In the game start process, error check regarding medal overflow in the medal auxiliary storage case, update of the bonus signal, setting of the specified number of medals, and if the replay is internally won, the number of medals inserted in the previous game The number of inserted medals is set, and if the replay is not internally won, the game idle timer for monitoring the non-game state time is set.

In step S803, the medal insertion / start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and the winning line indicator lamp 2120 is turned on according to the insertion of a medal. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a medal insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted to the first sub-control unit 2400. If the player wins the re-game in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 2135 has been operated, and if it is determined that the start operation has been performed, the number of inserted medals is determined and the start lever 2135 is operated with respect to the first sub-control unit 2400. Prepare to send a start lever reception command indicating that.

In step S804, the number of inserted medals is determined, and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S805, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired.

In step S806, the winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 2306 is read according to the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S805, and the internal lottery is performed. Preparations are made for transmitting an internal lottery command indicating the result to the first sub-control unit 2400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

In step S807, the reel stop data candidate selection process for selecting the reel stop control data candidate is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process.

In step S808, the reel rotation start process is executed to start the rotation of all reels 211 to 2112. Further, in step S808, preparations are made for transmitting a reel rotation start command indicating that the reels 210 to 2112 have started to rotate to the first sub-control unit 2400.

In step S809, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 2137 to 2139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel selected in step S807 is stopped in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. With reference to the stop table of the stop control data, any of the reels 210 to 2112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. When all reels 210 to 2112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S810.

In this step S809, preparations are made for transmitting a stop button reception command for the stop buttons 2137 to 2139 for each stop operation to the first sub-control unit 2400, and for each reel stop, preparations are made. Prepares to transmit a reel stop command regarding the reel stop position to the first sub-control unit 2400.

In step S810, a display determination (winning determination) is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 2114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is won. Further, in step S810, preparations are made for transmitting a display determination command indicating the result of the display determination to the first sub-control unit 2400.

In step S811, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S812, a game state control process is performed in which control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of winning a special role, prepare to start the special game state (RT2) from the next time. Further, in step S812, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control unit 2400. For example, when the gaming state is the special gaming state (RT2), preparations are made to transmit a gaming state command indicating the special gaming state (RT2). Further, the game state command includes information indicating the AT system game state as well as information indicating the RT system game state.

In step S812, when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the normal state, each game and AT lottery are executed, and when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the AT state, each game, Execute the AT addition lottery. Further, in step S812, the AT lottery result command (winning / non-winning, the number of AT games granted) indicating the result of the AT lottery and the result of the lottery of the AT addition lottery (winning / non-winning, granted) are shown. Number of AT-added games) Prepares to transmit the AT-added lottery result command to the sub-control unit 2400.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S802 and repeating the above-described processing.

The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S7006 in FIG. 91) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 2304 of the main control unit 2300 will be described with reference to FIG. 91. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 2300 includes a counter timer 2312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 1.5 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S7001, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 2304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S7002, the WDT2314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT2314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every 1.5 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S7003, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 2320 of the various sensors 2318 are input via the input port of the I / O 2310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 2308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 2318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S7004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. Specifically, the interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on the signals from the various sensors 2318), and processing is performed according to this status. For example, if the interrupt status is the medal insertion process, the medal insertion acceptance process is performed, and if the interrupt status is the payout process, the medal payout process is performed.

In step S7005, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S7006, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 2400. In the first sub-control unit 2400, the command type included in the received command enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 2300, and the information of the command data included in the command. It becomes possible to determine the production control content based on.

In step S7007, the external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 2308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 2100, via the information output circuit 2334.

In step S7008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S7003, the signal states of various sensors 2318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 2170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 2170 operates), various lamps 2338, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S7009, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S7011, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S7010.

In step S7010, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S7001 is set in each original register. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in step S7011, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 2308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 90.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 2400 will be described with reference to FIG. 92. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 2404 of the first sub-control unit 2400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 2400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 2400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 2400 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (a).

When the power is turned on, the initialization process (detailed later) is first executed in step S7101. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 2408, and the like are performed.

In step S7102, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S7103.

In step S7103, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S7104, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 2404 of the first sub-control unit 2400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 2300.

In step S7105, an effect control process (detailed later) is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S7104, the process corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 2406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S7106, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S7105. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 2418 in the effect data read in step S7105, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 2418.

In step S7107, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S7105. For example, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 2420 in the effect data read in step S7105, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 2422.

In step S7108, information output processing is performed in which a command is set to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 2500 based on the processing result of step S7105. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 2500 in the effect data read in step S7105, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S7102. As a result, the set control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 2500.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 2400 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control 2400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 2300. In step S7201 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 2300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 2408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 2404 of the first sub-control unit 2400 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (c). The first sub-control unit 2400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S7301, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 2408 described in step S7102 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 92A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S7102, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S7302, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

<Processing of the second sub control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIG. 93. Note that FIG. 93A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 2504 of the second sub-control unit 2500. FIG. 93B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 2500. FIG. 93 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 2500. FIG. 93 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 2500.

First, in step S7401 of FIG. 93A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S7401. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 2508, and the like are performed.

In step S7402, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S7403.

In step S7403, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S7404, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 2504 of the second sub-control unit 2500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 2404 of the first sub-control unit 2400.

In step S7405, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S7404, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image and the effect data for the shutter effect from the ROM 2506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from the ROM 2506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S7406, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S7405. For example, if there is a shutter control command in the effect data read in step S7405, the shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S7407, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S7405. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S7405, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S7402.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 2500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 2400.

In step S7601 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 2400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 2508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 2504 of the second sub-control unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (c). The second sub-control unit 2500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S7601, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 2508 described in step S7402 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 93A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S5002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S7602, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S5007 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S7701, the image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 2504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 2536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 2157. Next, the CPU 2504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 2506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 2536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 2534 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 2506 to VRAM 2536. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 2506 to the VRAM 2536 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 2534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 2504.

In step S7702, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 2534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S7703. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S7703, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 2536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 2536 in step S7701, the CPU 2504 determines the information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 2536, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP2534. The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S7704, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 2504 instructs VDP2534 to start drawing an image. The VDP2534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 2504.

In step S7705, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 2534 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S7706. If not, the generation end interrupt signal Wait for to be entered.

In step S7706, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 2508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Production control processing of the first control unit>
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect control process in step S7105 of FIG. 92 (a).

In step S7801, it is determined whether or not an operation by the player (for example, a medal insertion operation, a start lever operation, a stop operation, an effect button operation, etc.) has been performed. Whether or not the operation by the player has been performed is determined based on various commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. If the operation is performed by the player, the process proceeds to step S7802, and if not, the process proceeds to step S7808.

In step S7802, the effect update process is performed based on the operation of step S7801. For example, when executing the continuous effect in the AT state, the effect data corresponding to the operation of step S7801 of the set continuous effect is set (see FIGS. 86 (b) and 87).

In step S7803, it is determined whether or not the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the AT state. If the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the AT state, the process proceeds to step S7804, and if not, the process proceeds to step S7808.

In step S7804, the AT game update process is performed. In the AT game update process, processing such as updating the number of games in the AT state and updating the number of acquired games is performed.

In step S7805, it is determined whether or not the game is an AT provisional end game. The AT provisional end game means one game before the initial number of games (30 games) in the AT state, that is, the 29th game. If the game is an AT provisional end game, the process proceeds to step S7806, and if not, the process proceeds to step S7808.

In step S7806, the AT addition game number total processing is executed. In the total number of AT additional games, the total number of AT additional games given up to the AT provisional end game in the AT state is calculated. The number of AT addition games is based on the content of the AT addition lottery result command transmitted from the main control unit 300.

In step S7807, the continuous effect setting process is executed. In the continuous effect setting process, the continuous effect is set based on the total value of the number of AT added games in step S7806 (see FIG. 89 (b)).

In step S7808, other effect control processing is executed.

If the AT addition lottery is won between the AT provisional end game in the AT state and the end of the initial number of games and the number of AT addition games is given, the scenario of continuous production set in step S7807 is changed. You may. For example, when the AT addition lottery is won in the next game in which the continuous effect 4 is set, the resurrection display 2-b may be displayed instead of the resurrection display 2-b scheduled at our office. In this case, it is possible to execute a continuous effect that reflects the status of granting the privilege immediately before.

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
-Modification example of the end effect 2 FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect mode of the end effect 2. In the above embodiment, the end display 2 displays the character "end" that directly indicates that the AT state ends, and notifies that the AT state ends. However, the display mode of the end display 2 is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), a wording indirectly suggesting the end of the AT state (for example, "for example," do not forget to remove the card ") is displayed as the end display 2. May be good. You will be made aware that it is time to finish the game and leave your seat. Further, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), a wording for preventing immersiveness (for example, "Be careful of immersiveness. It is a play to enjoy moderately") may be displayed as the end display 2. While the AT state (privilege period) is ongoing, it is possible to recognize that the AT state (privilege period) has ended by displaying contents that are difficult to notify. Further, since the wording for preventing these enthusiasts is displayed at the end of the bonus, it is possible to indirectly notify that the AT state has ended. Further, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), an end image without characters (for example, an image displayed at the end of the AT state, an image displayed at the start of the normal state) may be set as the end display 2. In some cases, the player can intuitively grasp that the AT state has ended by looking at the image without displaying the characters.

-Modified example of the resurrection effect 2 FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect mode of the resurrection effect 2. In the above embodiment, the effect mode of the resurrection effect 2 is an effect image displayed on the effect image display device 2157. However, the production mode of the resurrection effect 2 is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 96, the effect button 2171 may be emitted to prompt the operation of the effect button 2171. The lamp provided inside the effect button 2171 may emit light, or the lamp provided outside the effect button 2171 may illuminate the effect button 2171. In this case, it indicates that the operation for the effect button 2171 cannot be accepted when the effect button 2171 is not lit (non-lighting state), and when the effect button 2171 is lit (light emitting state), the effect button 2171 is indicated. Indicates that the operation for is acceptable. Even in this case, there is an overlapping period between the execution period of the resurrection effect 1 and the execution period of the resurrection effect 2.

It should be noted that the effect button 2171 may not be emitted, but the effect button 2171 may be prompted to operate by emitting a lamp. For example, the lamp provided on the operation panel including the effect button 2171 may be made to emit light to encourage the operation of the effect button 2171. It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 2171 may be prompted by sound or vibration. For example, an effect that outputs a sound "Please operate the effect button" or an effect that vibrates the effect button may be performed.

The resurrection effect 2 may be an effect in which the main character and the enemy character fight in the same manner as the resurrection effect 1. For example, the main character that appeared in the resurrection production 1 and the enemy character that did not appear in the resurrection production 1 may fight. For example, the same effect may be used for the resurrection effect 1 and the effect for the effect up to the scene where the victory or defeat of the battle is known among the effects in which the main character and the enemy character fight. For example, another effect may be added to the resurrection effect 1 to make the resurrection effect 2.

-Example of modification of the reception period of the effect button FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a modification of the operation reception period of the effect button 2171. In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85, it is possible to accept the effect button 2171 from t3 when the revival display 1-b of the n + 1 game in the AT state ends, but as shown in FIG. 97, the AT state. It may be possible to accept the effect button 2171 from t1 at the time of winning determination of the n + 1th game. Of course, in this case, the resurrection display 2 is also displayed from t1 at the time of winning determination of the n + 1 game in the AT state. It is possible to satisfy the player who wants to know the result of the resurrection display as soon as possible.

-Example of modification of display of acquired number of sheets In the above embodiment, the acquired number of sheets in the AT state is displayed in the end display 1 (see FIG. 84), but the display of the acquired number of sheets in the AT state is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 98, in the production period at the end of the initial number of games in the AT state (the period of continuous production over the Gn game and the Gn + 1 game in the AT state), the acquired number d211 in the AT state is displayed. It may be. It is possible to emphasize that it is a series of production periods by displaying a part of the end display 1 (the number of acquired AT states) over the production period at the end of the initial number of games in the AT state. In addition, a period may be provided in which the player cannot visually recognize the acquired number d211 in the AT state in a part of the production period at the end of the initial number of games in the AT state.

-Example of modification of the number of times the revival effect is executed In the above embodiment, a configuration in which the revival effect is executed twice is adopted. However, the number of times the revival effect is executed is not limited to two. The resurrection effect may be executed three times or more. Here, when a configuration is adopted in which the revival effect can be executed N times (for example, N ≧ 3) and the N recovery activity effect is executed, the N-1th revival effect (privilege is not given). There is an overlapping period between the execution period of the Nth revival effect (notifying the result of giving the privilege or the result of not giving the privilege).

-Example of modification of the execution trigger of the resurrection display 2-a or the resurrection display 2-b In the above embodiment, the resurrection display 2-a or the resurrection display 2-b uses the operation for the effect button 2171 as the trigger to start the execution. The resurrection display 2-a or the resurrection display 2-b may be executed even if there is no operation on the effect button 2171 (for example, when a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying the resurrection display 2). ). In this case as well, the overlapping period of the resurrection display 1 and the resurrection display 2 is provided, and the disappointment of the resurrection display 1 can be reduced.

<Other game consoles>
In the above embodiment, a slot machine using a medal (coin) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball (for example, a pachinko ball) is used as a game medium. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, ball game machines, smart balls, casino machines, etc.

Note that the slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and the game medium in this case includes electronic data corresponding to the medals, and is a game medium. The input includes inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device), and the payout of the game medium involves inputting the digitized data to the predetermined external device (electronic storage device). It includes outputting. Hereinafter, embodiments in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine will be described in detail.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1100 according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 99. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 1100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 1100 is provided with an outer frame 1102, a main body 1104, a front frame door 1106, a door with a ball storage tray 1108, a launching device 1110, and a game board 1200 as external structures.

The outer frame 1102 is a wooden frame member made of a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 1104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 1102 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 1102 via a hinge portion 1112 to serve as a base body of a vertically rectangular game machine. Further, the main body 1104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 1114 inside. Further, when the main body 1104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 1104 is provided.

The front frame door 1106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 1104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1100, via a hinge portion 1112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 1106 is provided with a transparent plate member 1118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 1120 and a frame lamp 1122 are attached to the front side. The game area 1124 is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 1106 and the front surface of the game board 1200. Further, when the front frame door 1106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 1106 is provided.

The door 1108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 1104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1100 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. The door 1108 with a ball storage plate has an upper plate 1126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 1110. , The lower plate 1128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 1126, the ball removal button 1130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 1126 to the lower plate 1128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 1132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 1128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launcher 1110 by the operation of the player. A ball launch handle 1134 that launches into the game area 1124 of 1200, a chance button 1136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 1206 by the operation of the player, a chance button lamp 1138 that emits the chance button 1136, and a game store. The ball lending operation button 1140 that gives an instruction to lend a ball to the installed card unit (CR unit), the return operation button 1142 that gives an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, and the player's balance and card. It is provided with a ball rental display unit 1144 that displays the state of the unit. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 1128 is full is provided.

The launcher 1110 is attached below the main body 1104, and has a launch rod 1146 that rotates when the ball launch handle 1134 is operated by the player, and a launch mallet 1148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launch rod 1146. , Equipped with.

The game board 1200 has a game area 1124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 1104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 1114 of the main body 1104. The game area 1124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 1200 is attached to the main body 1104.

FIG. 100 is an external view of the pachinko machine 1100 of FIG. 99 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located below the ball tank 1150 for temporarily storing the game balls and the ball tank 1150 at the bottom of the ball tank 1150. A tank rail 1154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 1152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 1152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 1152.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 1154 and flows down into the payout device 1152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 1152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 1600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 1126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 1100, and the pachinko machine 1100 has this configuration. The ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 1152, there is a main board case 1158 for accommodating the main board 1156 constituting the main control unit 1300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 1300. The first sub-board case 1162 for accommodating the first sub-board 1160 constituting the first sub-control unit 1400 for processing, and the second sub for performing control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 1400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 1166 that houses the second sub-board 1164 that constitutes the control unit 1500, a payout control unit 1600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls, and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk. Power is supplied to the payout board case 1172 that houses the payout board 1170 including 1168, the launch board case 1176 that houses the launch board 1174 that constitutes the launch control unit 1630 that performs control processing related to the launch of the game ball, and various electrical game devices. A power supply board including a power supply switch 1178 that turns on and off the power supply by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 1180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 1300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 1184 for accommodating 1182 and a CR interface unit 1186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 1600 and the card unit are arranged.

FIG. 101 is a schematic front view of the game board 1200 as viewed from the front.
The outer rail 1202 and the inner rail 1204 are arranged on the game board 1200 to form a game area 1124 on which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 1206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 1124. In this effect device 1206, a decorative symbol display device 1208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 1210, a first special symbol display device 1212, a second special symbol display device 1214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 1208. A symbol holding lamp 1216, a first special symbol holding lamp 1218, a second special symbol holding lamp 1220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 1222 are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The effect device 1206 operates the effect movable body 1224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The decorative symbol display device 1208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 1208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 1208a, a middle symbol display area 1208b, a right symbol display area 1208c, and an effect display area 1208d, and the left symbol display area 1208a and the middle symbol display area 1208b. The right symbol display area 1208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 1208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 1208a, 1208b, 1208c, and 1208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 1208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 1208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 1210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 1212 and the second special figure display device 1214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment.

The normal figure holding lamp 1216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 1218 and the second special figure holding lamp 1220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure changing games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure changing game is performed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 1222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. Turns on when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 1206, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 1226, a normal drawing starting port 1228, a first special drawing starting port 1230, and a second special drawing starting port 1232. A variable winning opening 1234 is arranged.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 1226 are arranged on the game board 1200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 1226 (general winning opening 1226). (If a prize is won), the payout device 1152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 1126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 1126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 1226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 1100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". It is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 1228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 1124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 1200. One is arranged in. The ball that has passed through the starting port 1228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 1226. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 1228, the pachinko machine 1100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 1210.

In this embodiment, only one starting port 1230 of the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 1200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of balls into the first special figure start port 1230, the payout device 1152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls in the upper plate 1126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 1212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 1230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 1100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special figure starting port 1232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is arranged directly below the first special figure starting port 1230. The second special figure start port 1232 is provided with a blade member 1232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the blade member 1232a is closed. When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed by 1210, the blade member 1232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 1232 of the second special figure, the payout device 1152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 1126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 1214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 1232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 1100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning opening 1234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is arranged below the central portion of the game board 1200. This variable winning opening 1234 includes a door member 1234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 1234a is closed. The special figure display device stops the jackpot symbol by winning the special figure variable game. When displayed, the door member 1234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 1234, the payout device 1152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 1126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 1234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 1100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 1236 called a windmill and a game nail 1238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 1204, An out port 1240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning openings or starting openings to the back side of the pachinko machine 1100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 1100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 1126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 1146. And the launching mallet 1148 passes through the outer rail 1202 and the inner rail 1204 and launches into the game area 1124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 1124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 1236, the game nail 1238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 1226, variable winning opening 1234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 1230, 2nd special figure start port 1232), or without winning any winning port or start port, or just passing through the normal figure start port 1228, out port 1240 To reach.

<Direction device>
Next, the effect device 1206 of the pachinko machine 1100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 1206, a warp device 1242 and a stage 1244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 1224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 1206, a decorative symbol display device 1208 and a shielding device 1246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 1206, the decorative symbol display device 1208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 1242, the stage 1244, and the effect movable body 1224.

The warp device 1242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 1242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 1206 to the stage 1244 below the front surface of the effect device 1206 from the warp outlet 1242b.

In the stage 1244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 1242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 1200, or the like can roll, and in the central part of the stage 1244, the passing ball is the first special figure start port 1230. A special route 1244a is provided to facilitate entry into the ball.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 1224 includes an upper arm portion 1224a and a forearm portion 1224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 1224a to a shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 1224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 1224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 1208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 1246 includes a grid-like left door 1246a and a right door 1246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 1208 and the front stage 1244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 1246a and the right door 1246b, respectively. That is, the left door 1246a and the right door 1246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 1246a and the right door 1246b are closed, the shielding means overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 1208 so that it is difficult for the player to see. With the left door 1246a and the right door 1246b open, their inner ends slightly overlap the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 1208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 1208. Is. Further, the left door 1246a and the right door 1246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 1246a and the right door 1246b may be made visible to a part of the decorative pattern display device 1208 behind the lattice hole, or the shoji portion of the lattice hole may be closed with a semi-transparent lens body to be rearward. The display by the decorative symbol display device 1208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the obstacle portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 1208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 1100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 102. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the pachinko machine 1100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 1300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 1300. The first sub-control unit 1400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 1500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 1400, and the main control unit 1300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 1600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 1630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 1660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 1100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 1300 of the pachinko machine 1100 will be described.

The main control unit 1300 includes a basic circuit 1302 that controls the entire main control unit 1300, and the basic circuit 1302 includes a CPU 1304, a ROM 1306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 1308 for storing data, an I / O 1310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 1312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 1314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 1306 and the RAM 1308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 1400, which will be described later. The CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 1316 as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 1302 is a counter circuit 1318 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal transmitter 1316 is received (2 in this circuit). (It is assumed that two counters are built-in), and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, and an inner frame opening. A sensor circuit 1322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor and a lower plate full tank sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a counter circuit 1318 and a basic circuit 1302, and a predetermined symbol display. A drive circuit 1324 for controlling the display of the device, for example, the first special figure display device 1212 or the second special figure display device 1214, and a drive for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general figure display device 1210. A drive circuit for controlling the display of the circuit 1326 and various status display units 1328 (for example, the normal drawing holding lamp 216, the first special drawing holding lamp 1218, the second special drawing holding lamp 1220, the high accuracy middle lamp 1222, etc.). The 1330 is connected to a drive circuit 1334 for controlling various solenoids 1332 that open and close a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 1232a of the second special drawing start port 1232, a door member 1234a of the variable winning opening 1234, and the like. ..

When the ball detection sensor 1320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 1230, the sensor circuit 1322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 1318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 1318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 1230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure start port 1230. Stored in the register. Further, when the counter circuit 1318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port 1232, the counter circuit 1318 also latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 1232. , The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 1232.

Further, an information output circuit 1336 is connected to the basic circuit 1302, and the main control unit 1300 pachinko the information input circuit 1350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 1336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 1100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 1338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 1660 to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 1338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 1302.

Further, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 1340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 1304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 1340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 1300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 1400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 1600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 1400 and the payout control unit 1600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 1300, the first sub control unit 1400, and the payout control unit 1600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 1300 sends commands to the first sub control unit 1400 and the payout control unit 1600. Although it is configured so that signals can be transmitted, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 1400 and the payout control unit 1600 to the main control unit 1300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 1400 includes a basic circuit 1402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 1400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 1300, and the basic circuit 1402 includes a CPU 1404 and a CPU 1404. , ROM1406 for storing control programs and various production data, RAM1408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 1410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 1412 of the above is installed. The CPU 1404 of the basic circuit 1402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 1414 as a system clock. The ROM 1406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 1402 includes a sound source IC 1416 for controlling the sensor 1120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 1420 for controlling various lamps 1418 (for example, chance button lamp 1138), and an effect movable body 1224. Drive circuit 1422 for performing drive control, an effect movable body sensor 1424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 1224, a chance button detection sensor 1426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 1136, and a predetermined detection sensor, for example. A second sub for controlling the sensor circuit 1428 that outputs the detection signal from the movable body sensor 1424 and the chance button detection sensor 1426 to the basic circuit 1402, and the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 1208 and the shielding device 1246. The control unit 1500 is connected to the control unit 1500.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 1600, the launch control unit 1630, and the power supply control unit 1660 of the pachinko machine 1100 will be described.

The payout control unit 1600 mainly controls the payout motor 1602 of the payout device 1152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 1300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 1604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 1608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 1100 via the interface unit 1606.

The launch control unit 1630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 1134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 1600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 1134. Control of the launch motor 1632, which drives the launch rod 1146 and launch mallet 1148, and control of the ball feed device 1634, which supplies balls from the upper plate 1126 to the launcher 1110, based on control signals that indicate the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 1660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 1100 into direct current and converts it into a predetermined voltage to control each control unit such as the main control unit 1300 and the first sub control unit 1400, the payout device 1152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 1660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 1660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 1600 and the second sub control unit 1500, and the payout control unit 1600 supplies the main control unit 1300, the second sub control unit 1500, and the launch control unit. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to the 1630, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 103 (a) to 103 (c), the first special symbol display device 1212, the second special symbol display device 1214, the decorative symbol display device 1208, and the ordinary symbol display device 1210 of the pachinko machine 1100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special drawings and general drawings. FIG. 103 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting port 1230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 1232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 1212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 1214 repeatedly turns on all seven segments and one central segment to turn on the "variable display of special figure 2". Do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variable display of the symbol according to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 1212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the special figure 1 When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (which also corresponds to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 1214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, or after the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol mode of special figure 2 is displayed. The period up to the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, and hereinafter, the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of displays up to is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be performed a plurality of times in succession. FIG. 103 (a) shows 10 types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure J" as the stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display. In FIG. 103A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

"Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 1100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the time is shortened. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state, and the state of not shifting to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special figure A" is in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "special figure B" is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These "special figure A" and "special figure B" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively large amount of profit.

"Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure C" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure B" which is 15R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Both "Special Figure E" and "Special Figure F" are 2R and do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, and "special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special figure G" and "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 1208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, the "special figure" is intentionally displayed. By providing "G", "Special Figure H" and "Special Figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

Further, "Special Figure I" is the first out-of-line symbol, and "Special Figure J" is the second out-of-line symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

In the pachinko machine 1100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "Special Figure A" is also prepared as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 103 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 1230 or the second special figure start port 1232, that is, the ball has entered the first special figure start port 1230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special symbol starting port 1232, the left symbol display area 1208a, the middle symbol display area 1208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 1208. In each symbol display area of area 1208c, "decoration 1"-> "decoration 2"-> "decoration 3"-> ... "decoration 9"-> "decoration 10"-> "decoration 1"-> ... is displayed in this order. Perform "variable display of decorative patterns" to switch. Then, in the case of notifying the 15R jackpot of "special figure B", a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot correspond to the symbol display areas 1208a to 1208c is arranged. 1 ”and“ Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" "Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the 2R jackpot called "Hidden Probability Change" of "Special Figure E", the sudden 2R jackpot called "Special Figure F", or the first small hit of "Special Figure G", "Special Figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying the 2R jackpot called "special figure C" sudden change or the 2R jackpot called "special figure D" sudden time reduction, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is used. Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "Special Figure I" and the second deviation of "Special Figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 103 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 1208a to 1208c. indicate.

FIG. 103 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the sphere has passed through the normal drawing start port 1228, the normal symbol display device 1210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "variable display of normal map". Then, "Fu-zu A" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the normal-figure variable game, and "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the deviation of the normal-figure variable game. Also in FIG. 103 (c), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 1340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 104 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 1306.

In step S6001, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 1304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 1310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 1308 are set, and the WDT 1314 is set. Permission to operate and set initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 1314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S6003, the value of the counter of WDT1314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT1314 is restarted.

In step S6005, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 1338 from the power supply control unit 1660 to the main control unit 1300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 1304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S6003, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 1304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S6003. Proceed to S6007. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S6003, and step S6005 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S6007, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 1312, a predetermined port of the I / O 1310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 1400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 1308, and the like are performed.

In step S6009, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 1302 of the main control unit 1300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S6013).

Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RWM clear switch 1180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of a game store is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S6013 to put the basic circuit 1302 in the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 1308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S6013 to reset the basic circuit 1302 to the initial state, and if the power supply status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 1308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S6011 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S6013 to reset the pachinko machine 1100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S6013.

In step S6011, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 1308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 1308 is read, and after resetting to each register, the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 1304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 1100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S6015) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 1308 mounted on the basic circuit 1302 in the main control unit 1300 shown in FIG. 102 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S6011, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 1400 in step S6133 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 1300, which will be described later.

In step S6013, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 1308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S6013) of the main control unit 1300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in step S6133 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 1300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 1400.

In step S6015, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, there are two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter, the normal figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer. Update the two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure timer random number value provided in the RAM 1308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S6107 described later.

The main control unit 1300 repeatedly executes the process of step S6015 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 1300 includes a counter timer 1312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S6101, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 1304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S6103, the WDT is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT 1314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S6105, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 1320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 1310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 1308 for each of the various sensors 1320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 1308 for each ball detection sensor. It is read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 1308, and this information is stored in the detection signal storage area before the previous time divided in the RAM 1308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 1308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S6105, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S6105 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 1306 of the main control unit 1300 shown in FIG. 66 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S6105, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 1226, the variable winning opening 1234, the first special figure starting port 1230, and the second special drawing starting port 1232, or the normal drawing starting port 1228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning ports 1226 and 1234 and the starting ports 1230, 1232 and 1228 have been won. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 1226, the general winning opening 1226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 1226. The ROM 1306 of the main control unit 1300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S6107 and step S6109, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S6015 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 1300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 1308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 1308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number, and the value is obtained as the initial value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 1308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

In step S6111, the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 1300 is updated.

In step S6113, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 1210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 1212 is clocked. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for clocking, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop the symbol on the second special symbol display device 1214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time , Update various timers including a timer for timing a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S6115, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 1226, 1234 and the starting openings 1230, 1232, 1228, the winning ball number storage area provided in the RAM 1308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S6117, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In this prize acceptance process, it is determined whether or not the first special figure start opening 1230, the second special figure start opening 1232, the normal figure start opening 1228, and the variable winning opening 1234 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not the information matches the winning determination pattern information in step S6103. When the first special figure start port 1230 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 1308 is not full, the value is input from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 1318. In addition to acquiring the value as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value, the value is stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the second special figure start port 1232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 1308 is not full, a value is obtained from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 1318 in the special figure 2 winning random number value. In addition to acquiring the value as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value, the value is stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the normal figure start port 1228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 1308 is not full, the value is acquired as the normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When the variable winning opening 1234 is won, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 1234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

In step S6119, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 1600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S6121, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 1210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 1210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 1210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 1210 is configured so that the display mode is the outlier symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal drawing stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 1210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 103 (c)) and the off symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 103 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 1308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal map hit flag is on, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 1308 The blade member 1232a is open to the solenoid (1332) for opening / closing the blade member 1232a of the second special figure start port 1232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 1308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 1308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 1332 for driving the opening / closing of the blade, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 1308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 1308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is out of order, the out-of-normal map flag is turned on as described later. When this flag is off, even in the normal map state update process at the end of the predetermined stop display period described above (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). The setting area of the RAM 1308 is set to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S6123 without doing anything.

In step S6123, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 1232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the Pseudo-random number game is won or not by the random number lottery based on the Random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 1308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random number value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 1210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 1308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 1308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S6125). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 1214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 1214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).
Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S6133) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, in the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300, a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a general drawing Probability fluctuation flags Each flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation. When the flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 103 (a) are on, the special figure probability change flag is off, and the normal figure probability change flag is on. Is the special figure B, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the normal figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure. Special figure F when the probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure F when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, and special figure H when the second small hit flag is on. , The 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 1214 so as to have a special figure I when the first missed flag is on and a special figure I when the second missed flag is on. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 1308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 1214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability change symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time saving symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small hit symbol (special symbol G), second small hit symbol (special symbol H), first missed symbol (special symbol) Confirmation display of any one of I) and the first outlier symbol (special symbol J) is performed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 1308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 1308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S6133) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 1308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 1308 In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 1208 is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 1308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S6133) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the door member 1234a is open to the solenoid (1332) for opening / closing the door member 1234a of the variable winning opening 1234 until a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are won in the variable winning opening 1234. In addition to outputting the signal held in, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 1308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S6133) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 1234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (1332) for opening / closing the door member 1234a of the variable winning opening 1234, and the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 1308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S6133) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 1308 to set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 1208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 1308 is set to 100 times, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 1308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot. When this time saving flag is set to on, it is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, there is a higher possibility of hitting the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special map fluctuation game are shorter in the normal map high probability state than in the normal map low probability state. Further, in the high probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 1232a of the second special starting port 1232 tends to be longer than in the low probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the pair of blade members 1232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of games will be played in the variable winning opening 1234 during the jackpot game, and many games will be played in the second special figure starting port 1232 until the game balls enter. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases due to the ball entering the ball and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S6133) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 1308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is different, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 1308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S6127 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S6127). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S6125 and step S6127 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S6129), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S6131). Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 1300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 1208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure start port 1232 is performed. However, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special figure start port 1230 is notified with priority.

In step S6133, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 1400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 1400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, FRAM clear command, etc. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the special figure The value of the probability fluctuation flag is included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 1230 has won a prize, whether or not the second special figure start port 1232 has won a prize, and whether or not a variable winning port 1234 has won a prize. Including presence / absence.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related, which are stored in the RAM 1308 in the command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the like stored in the RAM 1308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 1308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 1208, various lamps 1418, and the speaker 1120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of reserved 1st special figure variable games or 2nd special figure variable games, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 1308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 1208, various lamps 1418, and the speaker 1120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of reserved 1st special figure variable games or 2nd special figure variable games, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 1308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 1308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. Further, in this step S6133, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 1308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 1400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 1300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S6135, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 1308 is output to the information input circuit 1350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 1100, via the information output circuit 1336.

In step S6137, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S6105 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. , When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 1400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 1332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 1232 and the variable winning opening 1234, and the normal symbol display device 1210 and the first special symbol display are displayed via the display circuits 1324, 1326, and 1330. The display data to be output to the device 1212, the second special symbol display device 1214, the various status display units 1328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 1310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S6119) is output to the first sub-control unit 1400 via the output port (I / O 1310).

In step S6139, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S6143, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S6141.

In step S6141, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S6101 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 104 is performed. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S6143, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 1308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 104.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
The processing of the first sub-control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. 106. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 1400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 1400. FIG. 3D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub-control unit 1400.

First, in step S6201 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in S6201. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 1408, and the like are performed.

In step S6203, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S6205.

In step S6205, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.
In step S6207, command processing is performed. The CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 1300.

In step S6209, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S6207, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 1406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S6211, when the press of the chance button is detected, the effect data updated in step S6209 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

In step S6213, if there is an instruction to VDP1434 in the effect data read in S6209, this instruction is output to VDP1434 (details will be described later).

In step S6215, if there is a command to the sound source IC 1416 in the effect data read in S6209, this command is output to the sound source IC 1416.

In step S6217, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 1418 in the effect data read in S6209, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 1420.

In step S6219, if there is a command to the cloaking device 1246 in the effect data read in S6209, this command is output to the drive circuit 1432.
In step S6221, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 1500 in the effect data read in S6209, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to S6203.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 1400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 1300. In step S6301 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 1300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 1408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 1400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S6401 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 1408 described in step S6203 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 106 (a). Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S6203, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S6403 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 1500 set in step S6221, and a random value value for effect is updated.

Next, the image control process in step S6213 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S6501, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 1404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 1436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 1208. Next, the CPU 1404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 1406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 1436), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 1434 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 1406 to VRAM 1436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP1434 transfers the image data from the ROM 1406 to the VRAM 1436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 1436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 1404.

In step S6503, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 1434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S6505. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S6505, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 1436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 1436 in step S6501, the CPU 1404 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 1436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP1434. The VDP1434 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S6507, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 1404 instructs VDP1434 to start drawing an image. The VDP1434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 1404.

In step S6509, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 1434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S6511, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for to be entered.

In step S6511, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 1408 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

The processing of the second sub-control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 1504 of the second sub-control unit 1500. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 1500. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 1500.

First, in step S6601 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in S6601. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 1508, and the like are performed.

In step S6603, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S6605.

In step S6605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S6607, command processing is performed. The CPU 1504 of the second sub-control unit 1500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400.

In step S6609, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S6607, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 1506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S6611, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 1400 to the game board lamp 1532 or the game underframe lamp 1542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 1520.

In step S6613, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 1400 to the effect movable body 1224, this command is output to the drive circuit 1516 and the process returns to S6603.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 1500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 1400. In step S6701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 1400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 1508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1504 of the second sub-control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 1500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S6801 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 1508 described in step S6603 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 107 (a). Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S6603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S6803 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

<Production image in decorative pattern display device>
Next, the effect of using the decorative symbol display device 1208 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing background images of the special figure low probability state and the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the background image is different between the special figure low probability state and the time saving state. Specifically, in a game in a special figure low probability state (hereinafter referred to as a normal game), a normal background image d3 (for example, an image in which two characters (lord, grandfather) are sitting) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 1208. In the game in the time saving state (hereinafter referred to as the time saving game), the time saving background images d4 to d6 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 1208. FIG. 108 (a) shows a normal background image d3, and FIGS. 108 (b) to (d) show time-saving background images d4 to d6.

The time-saving game of the present embodiment is a maximum of 30 games, and the background image changes every 10 games. Specifically, 108 (b) is a time-saving background image d4 of 1 to 10 games (wilderness stage), FIG. 108 (c) is a time-saving background image d5 of 11 to 20 games (sandy beach stage), and FIG. 108 (d) is. The time-saving background image d6 of 21 to 30 games (moon stage) is shown. The term "1 game" as used herein means that a ball enters the special figure start ports 1230 and 1232, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

In the time-saving game of the present embodiment, a judge effect that notifies whether the time-saving game continues in the final game of each stage (to be exact, the wilderness stage and the sandy beach stage) or the time-saving game ends and shifts to the normal game ( An effect corresponding to the "revival effect" of the above embodiment) is executed. That is, the judge effect is a privilege giving effect that notifies whether or not the privilege is given. Further, when 30 games of the time saving game are executed, the time saving game is ended and the normal game is started.

Specifically, in the judge production, a judge display (an image corresponding to the "revival display" of the above embodiment) is displayed in the game of the time saving game. Here, the delimiter game refers to a game in which the background image changes, and specifically, 10 games of time-saving games (games that may change from the time-saving background image d4 to the probabilistic background image d5), 20 games ( A game in which the time-saving background image d5 may change to the time-saving background image d6). Further, the judge display includes a judge display d11 (an image corresponding to the "revival display 1" of the above embodiment) and a judge display d12 (an image corresponding to the "revival display 2" of the above embodiment). ..

The judge display d11 is specifically an inserted image that covers the background image, expands the area (image area) from the left side to the right side of the screen, covers substantially the entire screen, and then reverses this time. It is an image that moves in the direction (from right to left), shrinks the area (image area), and finally disappears from the screen. Since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the background image while the judge display d11 is displayed, the judge display d11 is an effect of improving the expectation of the player. Then, after the judge display d11 disappears, the player grasps whether or not the time saving game is continued based on the display mode of the background image.

On the judge display d11 of the present embodiment, (1) a judge display d11-a (an image corresponding to the "revival display 1-a" of the above embodiment) indicating the characters of continuation is displayed, and the judge display d11 is displayed. A case where the screen of the decorative pattern display device 1208 is completely covered, and (2) a judge display d11-b (an image corresponding to the "revival display 1-b" of the above embodiment) that does not show the continuation character is displayed. There are cases where the judge display d11 does not completely cover the screen of the decorative symbol display device 1208.

In the case of (1) above, since the direct wording indicating the continuation of the time-saving game is displayed, it is the case where the time-saving game is continued. On the other hand, in the case of (2), there are cases where the time-saving game continues and cases where the time-saving game does not continue. In the case of (2), the judge display d11-b is a notification that the time saving game is completed from the display mode. However, after that, the judge display 2 may be displayed while the judge display 1 is being displayed. Then, when the judge display 2 is displayed, it is notified whether or not the time saving game is continued after the display of the judge display 2. That is, the judge display 2 is a production that reduces the disappointment of the player and regains a sense of expectation.

The judge display d12 is an image that may be displayed when the judge display d11-b is displayed, and specifically, is an image that prompts the operation of the chance button 1136. In the judge display d12 of the present embodiment, the background image is changed based on the player operating the chance button 113, so that the player grasps whether or not the time-saving game is continued from the display mode of the background image. be able to.

FIG. 109 shows a display mode in the case of notifying the continuation of the time-saving game in the tenth game of the time-saving game. That is, the time-saving game is a case where the game is continued after 11 games. More specifically, the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 1208 is shown when the ball enters the special figure start ports 1230 and 1232 and the tenth game is started after the ninth game of the time saving game is completed. In the time-saving game of the present embodiment, at the end of the game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped), the elapsed game number information d13 of the time-saving game is displayed in the upper left of the screen.

FIG. 109 (a-1) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol in the ninth game is completed. Since it is the ninth game of the time saving game, the time saving background image d4 is displayed as the background image. In addition, "9 times elapsed" is displayed as the elapsed game number information d13.

FIG. 109 (a-2) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol in the tenth game has started. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109 (a-2), the display of the judge display d11 is started when the delimited game is started, that is, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the delimited game. ..

As shown in FIGS. 109 (a-2) to 109 (a-4), the judge display d11 moves from the left side to the right side of the screen while expanding its area (image area). As a result, the time-saving background image d4 gradually reduces its area (image area). Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (a-4), the judge display d11 completely covers the screen of the decorative symbol display device 1208, and the time-saving background image d4 becomes invisible. In the present embodiment, when the judge display d11 is displayed on the entire surface, it means that the continuation of the time saving game is confirmed, so that the judge display d11-a of the characters "continue" is also displayed on the judge display d11.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 109 (a-5) to (a-7), the fully displayed judge display d11 moves while reducing its area (image area) from the right side to the left side of the screen. As a result, the time-saving background image d5 is gradually displayed on the screen and the area (image area) is enlarged. Eventually, the judge display d11 disappears from the screen, and the time-saving background image d5 is displayed entirely. Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (a-8), in a state where the time-saving background image d5 is completely displayed and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped, "10 times elapsed" is displayed as the elapsed game number information d13. Has been done.

As described above, the player can grasp that the time saving game is continued by visually recognizing the judge display d11-a and the time saving background image d5.

FIG. 110 shows a display mode when notifying the end of the time-saving game in the tenth game of the time-saving game. That is, the time saving game ends in 10 games. More specifically, the display mode of the decorative symbol display device is shown when the ball enters the special figure start ports 1230 and 1232 and the tenth game is started after the ninth game of the time saving game is completed.

110 (a-1) to (a-3) are the same as FIGS. 109 (a-1) to (a-3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Looking at the subsequent operation of the judge display d11 in FIGS. 109 (a-4) to (a-7), unlike the case of FIG. 109, the judge display d11 is not in the state of being fully displayed, and the characters "continue" are displayed. Since there is no such thing, the judge display d11 shown in FIG. 110 (a-4) is the judge display d11-b. After that, as shown in FIGS. 110 (a-5) to (a-7), after the judge display d11-b is displayed, the judge display d12 is not displayed, and the background image remains the time-saving background image d4. Is. That is, there is no notification of the continuation of the time saving game in the first judge display d11, and the second judge display d11 is not displayed. As a result, the time saving game ends in the tenth game of the time saving game. Is.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 110 (a-8), the normal background image d3 is displayed in place of the time-saving background image d4 in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped.

As described above, the player can grasp that the time saving game ends and the normal game starts by visually recognizing the judge display d11-b and the normal background image d3.

In FIG. 111, the continuation of the time-saving game was not notified in the first judge display d11 of the tenth game of the time-saving game, but after that, the second judge display d12 was started and the chance button was displayed in the second judge display 2. The display mode when the operation of 1136 is performed to notify the continuation of the time saving game is shown.

Since FIGS. 111 (a-1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 110 (a-1) to (a-5), description thereof will be omitted. That is, in this case as well, the continuation of the time-saving game is not notified on the first judge display d11.

However, after that, as shown in FIG. 111 (a-6), the judge display d12, which is an image prompting the operation of the chance button 1136, is displayed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111 (a-6), there is a period in which the judge display d11 and the judge display d12 overlap. As a result, even if the result of the judge display d11 is disappointed, the judge display d12 is displayed immediately, so that the period of disappointment can be shortened and the expectation for the privilege can be improved again.

Since the player operates the chance button 1136 according to the judge display d12, as a result, the time saving background image d5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (a-7). That is, it is a case where the time saving background image d4 is changed to the time saving background image d5 based on the operation for the chance button 1136. As a result, the time-saving game will continue after 11 games.

As described above, the player can grasp that the time saving game is continued by visually recognizing the judge display d12 and visually recognizing the time saving background image d5 based on the operation of the chance button 1136.

In FIG. 112, the continuation of the time-saving game was not notified in the first judge display d11 of the tenth game of the time-saving game, but after that, the second judge display d12 was started and the chance button was displayed in the second judge display 2. The display mode is shown when the operation of 1136 is not performed and the continuation of the time saving game is notified.

Since FIGS. 111 (a-1) to (a-6) are the same as those in FIGS. 110 (a-1) to (a-6), the description thereof will be omitted. That is, also in this case, the continuation of the time saving game is not notified in the first judge display d11, and the judge display d12 is displayed. In this case as well, as in FIG. 112 (a-6), there is a period in which the judge display d11 and the judge display d12 overlap. As a result, even if the result of the judge display d11 is disappointed, the judge display d12 is displayed immediately, so that the period of disappointment can be shortened and the expectation for the privilege can be improved again.

However, after that, as shown in FIG. 111 (a-7), the chance button 1136 is not operated.

The player did not operate the chance button 1136 according to the judge display d12, but as shown in FIG. 112 (a-8), the time saving background image d5 is displayed in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped. To. That is, there was no operation for the chance button 1136, but the time-saving background image d4 was changed to the time-saving background image d5. As a result, the time-saving game will continue after 11 games.

As described above, by visually recognizing the time-saving background image d5 after visually recognizing the judge display d12, the player can grasp that the time-saving game continues even if there is no operation for the chance button 1136.

[Summary of Embodiment]
(1) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Profit-giving means (for example, main control unit 300, medal granting process S511, game state control S512, etc.) that grants a predetermined profit based on an operation on the operating means.
Notification means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image display device 157, operation for notifying operation information (for example, information on the content of stop operation) for the operation means. Navi etc.) and
A game period setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods (for example, AT-type game states) determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Game state control process S512),
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of gaming periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state), an AT period (for example, an AT state), and a chance period (for example, an expected state).
The chance period is a period in which it is easier to shift to the AT period than the normal period.
The notification means is a means capable of notifying the operation information during the AT period (for example, when the small winning combination 3 is internally elected in the AT state).
The game period setting means is a means for shifting the game period from the chance period to the AT period when the first transition condition is satisfied in the chance period (for example, when the AT transition lottery is won).
The game period setting means is a means for shifting the game period from the AT period to the chance period when the second transition condition is satisfied in the AT period (for example, when the number of AT games is exhausted).
The AT period includes a first AT period (for example, an AT state of 10 games) and a second AT period (for example, an AT state of 20 or 30 games).
In the first AT period, when the operation means is operated according to the operation information notified by the notification means, the total amount of the predetermined profits given by the profit-giving means is the first. It ’s a profitable period,
In the second AT period, when the operation means is operated according to the operation information notified by the notification means, the total amount of the predetermined profits given by the profit-giving means is the first. It is a period of more second benefit than the benefit of
The chance period includes a first chance period (for example, an expected state of 10 games) and a second chance period (for example, an expected state of 20 or 30 games).
The second chance period is longer than the first chance period.
When the second transition condition is satisfied in the first AT period, the game period setting means sets the first chance period and the second chance period immediately after the end of the first AT period. It is a means to set with a higher probability than the probability to set,
When the second transition condition is satisfied in the second AT period, the game period setting means sets the second chance period and the first chance period immediately after the end of the second AT period. It is a means to set with a higher probability than the probability to set,
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, a short chance period is likely to be set after a low profit AT state, and a long chance period is likely to be set after a high profit AT state, so that a long chance is set. It has the effect of not boring the player even during the period.

In the first basic configuration above
When the game period setting means shifts from the normal period or the chance period to set the first AT period, the first AT period is set.
This is the first suitable configuration.

According to this first preferred configuration, it is possible to set an AT period in which the number of balls is unlikely to increase.

In the first basic configuration or the first preferred configuration,
The game period setting means is a means for setting the AT period after the predetermined period is completed without immediately ending the chance period when the first transition condition is satisfied in the first chance period. Yes,
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the second chance period, the game period setting means immediately ends the chance period and sets the AT period, or does not immediately end the chance period. It is a means for setting the AT period after the predetermined period is completed (for example, FIG. 39 (e)).
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to this second preferred configuration, the immediate AT period may be started in the second chance period, so that the interest can be improved even in the long chance period.

In the first basic configuration, the first preferred configuration, or the second preferred configuration,
The AT period further includes a third AT period (eg, AT state of 50, 70 games).
In the third AT period, when an operation is performed on the operation means according to the operation information notified by the notification means, the total amount of the predetermined profit given by the profit-giving means is the second. It is a period of more third benefit than the benefit of
When the second transition condition is satisfied in the third AT period, the game period setting means sets the second chance period and the first chance period immediately after the end of the third AT period. It is a means to set with a higher probability than the probability to set,
This is the third preferred configuration.

According to this third preferred configuration, it is likely that a second chance period will be set after the third AT period, which is more profitable than the second AT period, so further increase in ball output. You can expect it.

In the third preferred configuration,
The notification means internally wins the small winning combination 3 in the AT state when the same notification conditions are satisfied in any of the first AT period, the second AT period, and the third AT period. It is a means for notifying the operation information based on the case).
The AT period and the chance period are both periods defined by the number of games.
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to this fourth preferred configuration, the AT period and the chance period can be compared by a common index of the number of games, so that the game playability is easy to understand.

In the first basic configuration, the first preferred configuration, the second preferred configuration, the third preferred configuration, or the fourth preferred configuration,
The second frequency has a zero probability of occurring,
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to this fifth preferred configuration
Even if the AT period and the chance period alternate, there will be no sudden increase in the number of balls. In other words, it is possible to frequently carry out consecutive villas with an appropriate AT period and a chance period.
(2) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Notification means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image) for notifying notification means (for example, information regarding the content of stop operation) for notifying operation information for the operation means. Display device 157, operation navigation, etc.)
A game period setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods (for example, AT-type game states) determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Game state control process S512),
An effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of gaming periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state), an AT period (for example, an AT state), and a chance period (for example, an expected state).
The chance period is a period in which it is easier to shift to the AT period than the normal period.
The notification means is a means capable of notifying the operation information during the AT period (for example, when the small winning combination 3 is internally elected in the AT state).
The game period setting means is a means for shifting the game period from the chance period to the AT period when the first transition condition is satisfied in the chance period.
The game period setting means is a means for shifting the game period from the AT period to the chance period when the second transition condition is satisfied in the AT period.
When it is confirmed by the game period setting means that the AT period is set immediately after the end of the chance period, the effect executing means performs a definite suggestion effect (for example, a story effect of story 6) in the chance period. It ’s a viable means,
The game period setting means is expected when a condition for immediately interrupting the chance period is satisfied in the chance period in which the effect executing means is executing the definite suggestion effect (for example, winning an AT transition lottery). If the state end lottery is won), the chance period can be immediately interrupted and the AT period can be set.
This is the second basic configuration.

According to this second basic configuration, it is possible to expect the player to shorten the chance period while notifying the player that the AT period is fixed.

In the second basic configuration above
When the condition for immediate interruption is satisfied in the chance period in which the effect executing means is executing the definite suggestion effect, the game period setting means sets the AT period immediately after the chance period ends. It is a means capable of setting the chance period immediately after the end of the AT period and setting the AT period immediately after the end of the chance period (for example, FIG. 44A).
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to this sixth preferred configuration, the player can obtain two benefits of adding an AT period and shortening the chance period.

In the second basic configuration or the sixth preferred configuration,
The chance period includes a first chance period (for example, an expected state of 10 games) and a second chance period (for example, an expected state of 20 or 30 games).
The second chance period is longer than the first chance period.
The effect executing means is a means that does not execute the definite suggestion effect during the first chance period.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the definite suggestion effect during the second chance period.
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to this seventh preferred configuration, since the definite suggestion effect is executed in a long chance period, it is possible to improve the interest even if the disadvantageous period continues for a long time.

In the second basic configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, or the seventh preferred configuration,
When the game period setting means immediately interrupts the chance period, the effect executing means executes the definite suggestion effect in the chance period immediately after the end of the AT period, which is started immediately after the end of the chance period. Is a means to
This is the eighth preferred configuration.

According to this eighth preferred configuration, since two AT periods are stocked, the chance period is not bored and the expectation for the AT period can be increased.
(3) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Notification means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image display device 157, operation for notifying operation information (for example, information on the content of stop operation) for the operation means. Navi etc.) and
A game period setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods (for example, AT-type game states) determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Game state control process S512),
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and a privilege period (for example, a privilege period).
The game period setting means is a means capable of setting a plurality of AT periods (for example, AT state) in the privilege period.
The AT period is a period during which the notification means can notify the operation information.
When the game period setting means is set a plurality of times, a plurality of the game period setting means are used for the AT period (hereinafter, referred to as the first AT period) excluding the last AT period included in the privilege period. One of the values (hereinafter referred to as the first group group) (for example, 10, 20, 30, 33, 50, 55, 70) is selected, and the selected value is used as the first value. It is a means to set as the first value to specify the AT period of
The plurality of types of values are values that mean the length of the AT period, respectively.
The game period setting means is a part of the value of the first group group (hereinafter, the second AT period) with respect to the last AT period (hereinafter, referred to as the second AT period) included in the privilege period. One of the values (referred to as a group group) (for example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 70) is selected, and the selected value is set as the second value for specifying the second AT period. Means,
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, for the last AT period of the privilege period, a special AT period toward the end of the privilege period is set by narrowing the numerical options for specifying the AT period. be able to.

In the third basic configuration above
The game period setting means is a means for ending the privilege period based on a predetermined specific period end condition (for example, when the limiter of the privilege period is reached) which is the upper limit of the privilege period.
When setting the second AT period, the game period setting means is a means for setting the second value under the limitation of the predetermined specific period end condition.
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

According to this ninth preferred configuration, since the last AT period is set within the range of the privilege period, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive profit to the player.

In the ninth preferred configuration,
The predetermined specific period end condition is a condition that is satisfied when the number of games in the privilege period reaches the first number of games N1 (for example, the number of digested games is 1000).
When the game period setting means sets the second AT period when the remaining number of games up to the first game number N1 is R1 (for example, the remaining 100 games) in the privilege period, the second AT period is set. A value A1 (for example, 50) corrected from a predetermined value (for example, 70) selected from the group group is set as the second value.
When the game period setting means sets the second AT period in R2 (for example, the remaining 50 games) in which the number of remaining games up to the first number of games N1 is smaller than that of R1 in the privilege period. , A means for setting a value A2 (for example, 20) corrected from the predetermined value (for example, 70) selected from the second group group as the second value.
R1-A1> R2-A2,
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

According to this tenth preferred configuration, it is possible to comfortably end the AT state while appropriately suppressing ball ejection.

In the third basic configuration, the ninth preferred configuration, or the tenth preferred configuration,
A lottery means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination) that executes a lottery process related to a game using lottery data associated with a set value selected from a plurality of types of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Further equipped with internal lottery processing S505)
The plurality of types of set values are high set values (for example, settings 4 to 6) in which a result advantageous to the player is likely to be derived by the lottery process, and a result advantageous to the player by the lottery process. Includes low setting values that are unlikely to be derived (eg, settings 1-3).
The value of the first group group includes a setting suggestion value (for example, 33, 55) selected in a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the high set value, and the high value. A normal value selected in both a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the set value and a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the low set value. (For example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 70) and
The game period setting means sets the normal value to the second value.
This is the eleventh preferred configuration.

Since the second value can be corrected for the final AT period, if the second value is set as the suggested number, the player will be confused. Therefore, in this eleventh preferable configuration, the second value is set as a normal value so as not to confuse the player.

In the third basic configuration, the ninth preferred configuration, the tenth preferred configuration, or the eleventh preferred configuration.
The game period setting means is a means for setting an ending AT period (for example, an AT state (ending)) having a predetermined fixed period (for example, 10 games) immediately after the end of the second AT period. ,
The privilege period is a period including the ending AT period.
This is the twelfth suitable configuration.

According to this twelfth preferred configuration, since the privilege period can be ended in the AT period of the fixed period, it is possible to proceed with the game with peace of mind and prepare for the normal period.
(4) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Notification means for notifying operation information to the operation means For example, notification means for notifying the content of a stop operation (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image display. Device 157, operation navigation, etc.)
A game period setting means (for example, main control unit 300, game state control process S512) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
A lottery means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination) that executes a lottery process related to a game using lottery data associated with a set value selected from a plurality of types of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Internal lottery process S505) and
An effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and a privilege period (for example, a privilege period).
The game period setting means is a means capable of setting a plurality of AT periods (for example, AT state) in the privilege period.
The AT period is a period during which the notification means can notify the operation information.
When the game period setting means is set a plurality of times, a plurality of the game period setting means are used for the AT period (hereinafter, referred to as the first AT period) excluding the last AT period included in the privilege period. One of the values (hereinafter referred to as the first group group) (for example, 10, 20, 30, 33, 50, 55, 70) is selected, and the selected value is used as the first value. It is a means to set as the first value to specify the AT period of
The plurality of types of values are values that mean the length of the AT period, respectively.
When the game period setting means sets the AT period a plurality of times, the first group group with respect to the last AT period (hereinafter, referred to as a second AT period) included in the privilege period. One of the values (hereinafter referred to as a second group group) (for example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 70) is selected, and the selected value is used as the second AT. It is a means to set as a second value to specify the period,
The plurality of types of set values are high set values (for example, settings 4 to 6) in which a result advantageous to the player is likely to be derived by the lottery process, and a result advantageous to the player by the lottery process. Includes low setting values that are unlikely to be derived (eg, settings 1-3).
The value of the first group group includes a setting suggestion value (for example, 33, 55) selected in a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the high set value, and the high value. A normal value selected in both a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the set value and a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the low set value. (For example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 70) and
The game period setting means sets the normal value to the second value.
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to this fourth basic configuration, since the normal value is set instead of the setting suggestion value for the final AT period, the player can improve the expectation for the subsequent execution of the effect.

In the fourth basic configuration above
The game period setting means is a means for setting an ending AT period (for example, an AT state (ending)) having a predetermined fixed period (for example, 10 games) immediately after the end of the second AT period. ,
The privilege period is a period including the ending AT period.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing a set value suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests the selected set value.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the set value suggestion effect during the ending AT period.
This is the thirteenth suitable configuration.

According to this thirteenth preferred configuration, since the set value suggestion effect can be executed during the ending AT period of the fixed period, the content of the set value suggestion effect can be reliably recognized.

In the thirteenth preferred configuration,
The game period setting means is a means for ending the privilege period based on a predetermined specific period end condition (for example, when the limiter of the privilege period is reached).
When the second value is set for the second AT period, the game period setting means takes into account the predetermined specific period end condition and the fixed period of the ending AT period, and the second value. Select a value from the group of
This is the 14th preferred configuration.

According to this 14th preferred configuration, since the last AT period and the ending AT period are set within the range of the privilege period, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive profit to the player.

Further, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like),
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Notification means for notifying operation information to the operation means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image display device 157, operation navigation, etc.)
A game period setting means (for example, main control unit 300, game state control process S512) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
A lottery means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination) that executes a lottery process related to a game using lottery data associated with a set value selected from a plurality of types of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Internal lottery process S505) and
An effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and a privilege period (for example, a privilege period).
The game period setting means is a means capable of setting a plurality of AT periods (for example, AT state) in the privilege period.
The AT period is a period during which the notification means can notify the operation information.
When the game period setting means is set a plurality of times, a plurality of the game period setting means are used for the AT period (hereinafter, referred to as the first AT period) excluding the last AT period included in the privilege period. One of the values (hereinafter referred to as the first group group) (for example, 10, 20, 30, 33, 50, 55, 70) is selected, and the selected value is used as the first value. It is a means to set as the first value to specify the AT period of
The plurality of types of values are values that mean the length of the AT period, respectively.
When the game period setting means sets the AT period a plurality of times, the plurality of types of values are set with respect to the last AT period (hereinafter, referred to as a second AT period) included in the privilege period. One of the values (hereinafter referred to as the second group group) (for example, 10, 20, 30, 33) is selected, and the selected value specifies the second AT period. It is a means to set as the second value to be
The plurality of types of set values are high set values (for example, settings 4 to 6) in which a result advantageous to the player is likely to be derived by the lottery process, and a result advantageous to the player by the lottery process. Includes low setting values that are unlikely to be derived (eg, settings 1-3).
The value of the first group group includes a setting suggestion value (for example, 33, 55) selected in a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the high set value, and the high value. A normal value selected in both a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the set value and a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the low set value. (For example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 70) and
When the value selected from the second group group is the setting suggestion value, the game period setting means again sets the normal value closest to the setting suggestion value and smaller than the setting suggestion value. Select from the group of, and set the selected value to the second value.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing a set value suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting the selected set value after the second AT period is started.
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to this fifth basic configuration, a normal value is set instead of a set suggestion value for the final AT period, so that the player expects the execution of the set value suggestion effect in the final AT period. Can be improved.
(5) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Notification means for notifying operation information to the operation means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image display device 157, operation navigation, etc.)
A game period setting means (for example, main control unit 300, game state control process S512) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
A lottery means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination) that executes a lottery process related to a game using lottery data associated with a set value selected from a plurality of types of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Internal lottery process S505) and
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of gaming periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and an AT period (for example, an AT state).
The AT period is a period during which the notification means can notify the operation information.
The game period setting means selects one of a plurality of types of values (for example, 10, 20, 30, 33, 50, 55, 70), and uses the selected value as the AT period. It is a means to set as a specific value to specify,
The plurality of types of values are values that mean the length of the AT period, respectively.
The plurality of types of set values are high set values (for example, settings 4 to 6) in which a result advantageous to the player is likely to be derived by the lottery process, and a result advantageous to the player by the lottery process. Includes low setting values that are unlikely to be derived (eg, settings 1-3).
The plurality of types of values include a setting suggestion value (for example, 33, 55) selected in a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the high set value, and the high set value. A normal value selected in both a game in which the lottery process is performed using the associated lottery data and a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the low set value (for example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 70) and
The game period setting means sets either the setting suggested value or the normal value as the specific value.
This is the sixth basic configuration.

According to this sixth basic configuration, the set value can be estimated while enjoying the AT period.

In the sixth basic configuration above
A specific value notification means for notifying the set specific value (for example, AT game number notification effect, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, effect image display device 157, etc.) is further provided.
When the specific value notification means notifies the specific value (for example, 20) a plurality of times, the specific value notification means notifies a value smaller than the specific value (for example, 10) in the first notification, and after the first time. It is a means for notifying the specific value (for example, 20) in the notification of.
When the normal value (for example, 20) is set as the specific value, the specific value notification means notifies the normal value (for example, 10) which is a value smaller than the specific value in the first notification. However, it is a means for notifying the normal value (for example, 20), which is the specific value, in the next and subsequent notifications (for example, FIGS. 45, 47, etc.).
The specific value notification means is a means that does not notify the setting suggestion value in either the first notification or the subsequent notification.
This is the fifteenth suitable configuration.

According to this fifteenth preferred configuration, when a normal value is set as a specific value, the set value is not inferred.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration,
When the setting suggestion value is set as the specific value (for example, 55), the specific value notification means notifies the normal value (for example, 20) in the first notification, and in the next and subsequent notifications. Notifying the setting suggestion value (for example, 55) (for example, FIG. 48),
This is the 16th preferred configuration.

According to this 16th preferable configuration, when the setting suggestion value is set as a specific value, the set value can be estimated by the later notification, so that the player's judgment is not confused.

In the 16th preferred configuration,
The notice effect execution means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc.) that executes the notice effect (for example, AT continuation suggestion effect) for notifying that the specific value notification means notifies the specific value. Further equipped with an effect image display device 157)
The advance notice effect executing means is a means capable of executing the advance notice effect after the specific value notification means has notified the normal value (for example, FIG. 48B).
The advance notice effect executing means is a means that does not execute the advance notice effect after the specific value notification means notifies the setting suggestion value (for example, FIG. 48B).
This is the 17th preferred configuration.

According to this 17th preferred configuration, the advance notice effect can be effectively used without wasting it.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration,
The setting suggestion value includes a first setting suggestion value (for example, 33) and a second setting suggestion value (for example, 55).
The second setting suggestion value is a value including information more advantageous to the player than the first setting suggestion value.
When the second setting suggestion value is set as the specific value, the specific value notification means notifies the first setting suggestion value in the first notification, and the second setting suggestion value in the next and subsequent notifications. It is a means that can notify the setting suggestion value of,
This is the 18th preferred configuration.

According to this eighteenth preferable configuration, even when the setting suggestion value is notified for the first time, it is possible to improve the interest for the notification after the next time, and the enjoyment of guessing the set value continues. Will be done.
(6) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Profit-giving means (for example, main control unit 300, medal granting process S511, game state control S512, etc.) that grants a predetermined profit (for example, the number of medals to be paid out) based on the operation on the operating means.
Notification means for notifying operation information to the operation means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image display device 157, operation navigation, etc.)
A game period setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods (for example, AT-type game states) determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Game state control process S512),
An effect image display means for displaying an effect image (for example, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500, an effect image display device 157), and
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of gaming periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and an AT period (for example, an AT state).
The notification means is a means for notifying the operation information during the AT period.
The game period setting means is a means for ending the AT period when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the AT period (for example, MY2000 sheets).
The predetermined end condition is a condition that is satisfied when the operation mode for the operation means is the first operation mode (for example, a correct stop operation when the push order combination is internally won), and the operation means. It is a condition that is not satisfied when the operation mode for is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, an operation to stop an incorrect answer when the push order combination is internally won).
The game period setting means ends the AT period when the operation mode for the operation means becomes the first operation mode and the predetermined end condition is satisfied in the final scheduled game of the AT period. When the operation mode for the operation means becomes the second operation mode and the predetermined end condition is not satisfied, the AT period is not terminated and is continued.
The effect image display means is a means for displaying a final game effect image (for example, a final game preview image d150) indicating that the final game in the AT period is the final game in the AT period.
The effect image display means follows the notification of the operation information by the notification means in the final scheduled game during the AT period, so that the operation mode for the operation means becomes the first operation mode. When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, an AT period end effect image (for example, AT end image d160) indicating that the AT period has ended is displayed, while the notification means is displayed in the final scheduled game of the AT period. When the operation mode for the operation means becomes the second operation mode and the predetermined end condition is not satisfied by not following the notification of the operation information by the means, the AT period end image is not displayed. is there,
This is the seventh basic configuration.

According to this seventh basic configuration, it is possible to improve the expectation in the final game scheduled for the AT period, and if a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the final game scheduled for the AT period, it is profitable. The AT period can be ended with a sense of satisfaction.

In the seventh basic configuration above
The effect image display means is the final game after starting the display of the final game effect image in the final scheduled game during the AT period and before the operation mode for the operation means becomes the second operation mode. It is a means to end the display of the production image,
This is the 19th preferred configuration.

According to this nineteenth preferred configuration, the display of the final game image does not confuse the player regardless of the result of the game.

In the nineteenth preferred configuration above
The effect image display means displays the final game effect image after starting the display of the final game effect image in the final scheduled game during the AT period and before the operation on the operation means becomes possible. A way to end,
This is the 20th preferred configuration.

According to this twentieth preferred configuration, since the display of the final game image is terminated before the operation, there is an operation error, and even if the next game exists, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In the nineteenth preferred configuration above
The effect image display means displays the final game image when the operation mode for the operation means becomes the first operation mode and the predetermined end condition is satisfied in the final scheduled game during the AT period. Is a way to end
This is the 21st preferred configuration.

According to this 21st preferred configuration, since the display of the final game image is terminated based on the content of the operation, it becomes easy to recognize the end or continuation of the AT period.

In the seventh basic configuration, the nineteenth preferred configuration, the twentieth preferred configuration, or the twenty-first preferred configuration.
When the operation mode for the operation means becomes the first operation mode and the predetermined end condition is satisfied in the final scheduled game during the AT period, the effect image display means displays the final game effect image. In addition, or instead of the final game effect image, the AT period end effect image is displayed at the first timing, while in the final scheduled game of the AT period, the operation mode for the operation means is the second. It is a means for continuously displaying the final game effect image until at least the first timing (for example, the third stop operation) when the predetermined end condition is not satisfied in the operation mode.
The effect image display means is at least the first when the operation mode for the operation means becomes the second operation mode and the predetermined end condition is not satisfied in the final scheduled game during the AT period. This is a means for starting the display of the final game effect image in the next game of the final scheduled game during the AT period after erasing the display of the final game effect image continuously displayed until the timing of.
This is the 22nd preferred configuration.

According to this 22nd preferred configuration, the situation can be accurately communicated to the player even in the case of an operation error.
(7) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Notification means for notifying operation information to the operation means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image display device 157, operation navigation, etc.)
A game period setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods (for example, AT-type game states) determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Game state control process S512),
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and a privilege period (for example, a privilege period).
The game period setting means is a means capable of setting a plurality of AT periods (for example, AT state) in the privilege period.
The AT period is a period during which the notification means can notify the operation information.
A first counting means for counting the passage of the privilege period (for example, a privilege period counter, a main control unit 300),
A second counting means (for example, an ending counter, a main control unit 300) for counting the passage of the last AT period included in the privilege period, and
With
When the first counting means counts up to the number of starts (for example, the first threshold value 990 of the count c1) at which the last AT period starts in the lapse of the privilege period, the game period setting means counts the last AT. It is a means to set the period,
When the first counting means counts up to the first number of ends (for example, the second threshold value 1000 of the count c1) that ends the privilege period in the lapse of the privilege period, the game period setting means is the last. It is a means to end the AT period and the privilege period.
When the second counting means counts the number of second ends (for example, the threshold value 10 of the count c2) that ends the last AT period in the lapse of the last AT period, the game period setting means It is a means to end the last AT period and the privilege period.
The first number of ends is equal to or greater than the number obtained by adding the number of second ends to the number of starts.
This is the eighth basic configuration.

According to this eighth basic configuration, the last AT period and privilege period can be surely ended.

In the eighth basic configuration above
Further provided with progress display means (for example, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, effect image display device 157) for displaying the elapse of the period (for example, the number of games image d140).
The progress display means is a means for displaying the progress counted by the second counting means during the last AT period, but not displaying the progress counted by the first counting means (for example, FIG. 61). ,
This is the 23rd preferred configuration.

According to this 23rd preferred configuration, the player can be surely aware that the last AT period is over. Also, do not overly incite the end of the privilege period.

In the eighth basic configuration or the 23rd preferred configuration,
Further provided with an AT period granting means (main control unit 300, AT transition lottery, etc.) for granting the AT period based on the establishment of a predetermined grant condition.
The game period setting means sets the AT period when the AT right granting means grants the AT period and a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, the number of stocks is 1 or more and the specified number of games in the expected state is consumed). It ’s a way to get started,
The last AT period is a fixed period (eg, 10 games).
The AT right granting means is a means that does not satisfy the predetermined granting condition during the last AT period.
This is the 24th preferred configuration.

According to this 24th preferred configuration, since the last AT period is a fixed period even if there is no opportunity to grant the AT period, the privilege period can be surely completed.

In the eighth basic configuration, the 23rd preferred configuration, or the 24th preferred configuration,
Independent of the first counting means, a third counting means (for example, the privilege period counter 2) for counting the passage of the privilege period is further provided.
The game period setting means is a means for ending the last AT period and the privilege period when the third counting means counts up to the first end number in the lapse of the privilege period.
This is the 25th preferred configuration.

According to this 25th preferred configuration, if a problem occurs in the first counting means, a problem may occur in the counting of the second counting means, but due to the existence of the third counting means, the failure may occur. The last AT period and privilege period can be surely ended.
(8) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Notification means for notifying operation information to the operation means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image display device 157, operation navigation, etc.)
A game period setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods (for example, AT-type game states) determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Game state control process S512),
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and a privilege period (for example, a privilege period).
The game period setting means is a means capable of setting a plurality of AT periods (for example, AT state) in the privilege period.
The AT period is a period during which the notification means can notify the operation information.
The privilege period is a series of periods including the AT period a plurality of times.
A first counting means for counting the passage of the privilege period (for example, a privilege period counter, a main control unit 300),
A second counting means (for example, an ending counter, a main control unit 300) for counting the passage of the last AT period included in the privilege period, and
With
When the first counting means counts up to the number of starts (for example, the first threshold value 950 of the count c1) at which the last AT period starts in the lapse of the privilege period, the game period setting means counts the last AT. It is a means to set the period,
When the first counting means counts up to the first number of ends (for example, the second threshold value 1000 of the count c1) that ends the privilege period in the lapse of the privilege period, the game period setting means is the last. It is a means to end the AT period and the privilege period.
When the second counting means counts the number of second ends (for example, the threshold value 10 of the count c2) that ends the last AT period in the lapse of the last AT period, the game period setting means A means of ending the last AT period and the privilege period.
This is the ninth basic configuration.

According to this ninth basic configuration, the last AT period and the privilege period can be surely ended.

In the ninth basic configuration above
When a predetermined counting interruption condition is satisfied in the last AT period (for example, one or two bets), the second counting means interrupts counting the elapse of the last AT period, and the above-mentioned When a predetermined counting restart condition is satisfied (for example, three bets) in a state where counting the passage of the last AT period is interrupted, it is a means for restarting counting the passage of the last AT period.
The first counting means is a means for counting the progress of the privilege period regardless of whether or not the predetermined counting interruption condition is satisfied in the last AT period.
The first number of ends is equal to or greater than the number obtained by adding the number of second ends to the number of starts.
This is the 26th preferred configuration.

According to this 26th preferred configuration, even if the last AT period is varied, the last AT period and the privilege period can be surely ended.

In the 26th preferred configuration,
An AT period granting means (main control unit 300, AT transition lottery, etc.) for granting the AT period based on the establishment of a predetermined grant condition is further provided.
The game period setting means sets the AT period when the AT period granting means grants the AT period and a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, the number of stocks is 1 or more and the specified number of games in the expected state is consumed). It ’s a way to get started,
The last AT period is a fixed period (eg, 10 games).
The AT period granting means is a means that does not satisfy the predetermined granting condition in the last AT period.
This is the 27th preferred configuration.

According to this 27th preferred configuration, since the last AT period is a fixed period even if there is no opportunity to grant the AT period, the privilege period can be surely completed.

In the ninth basic configuration, the 26th preferred configuration, or the 27th preferred configuration,
A third counting means (for example, a privilege period counter 2) that counts the passage of the privilege period independently of the first counting means is further provided.
The game period setting means is a means for ending the last AT period and the privilege period when the third counting means counts up to the first end number in the lapse of the privilege period.
This is the 28th preferred configuration.

According to this 28th preferred configuration, if a defect occurs in the first counting means, the counting of the second counting means may also be defective, but due to the existence of the third counting means, The last AT period and privilege period can be surely ended.
(8) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the seventh embodiment and the like).
An effect execution means (for example, an effect image display device 2157, a first sub-control unit) that executes an expected effect (for example, revival effects 1 and 2) indicating whether or not a predetermined privilege (for example, the number of AT additional games) has been granted. 2400, 2nd sub-control unit 2500, etc.)
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the expected effect N times (N is a natural number) (for example, twice).
When the effect executing means executes the expected effect once, the first expected effect (for example, resurrection effect 1-a) indicating that the predetermined privilege has been granted in the first expected effect. ) Is a viable means,
When the effect executing means executes the expected effect N times (N is a natural number of 2 or more) (for example, 2 times), the predetermined effect is performed in the expected effect up to the N-1th time (for example, the first time). The second expected effect (for example, resurrection effect 1-b) indicating that the privilege of is not granted is executed, and in the Nth (for example, the second) expected effect, the first expected effect (for example) , Resurrection production 2-a) is a viable means,
When the effect executing means executes the expected effect N times (N is a natural number of 2 or more) (for example, 2 times), before the N-1th time (for example, the first time) of the expected effect is completed. It is a means for starting execution of the expected effect for the Nth time (for example, the second time).
This is the tenth basic configuration.

According to this tenth basic configuration, since the execution of the Nth expected effect is started before the N-1th expected effect is completed, the period of disappointment of the player can be shortened, and the player's disappointment can be shortened. You can improve your interest again.

In the tenth basic configuration above
The predetermined privilege includes a first privilege (for example, the total number of AT additional games is less than 50) and a second privilege (for example, the number of AT additional games) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. 50 or more in total), including,
When the second privilege is given, the effect executing means is a means for executing the expected effect once with a probability higher than the probability of executing the expected effect N times (N is a natural number of 2 or more). (For example, FIG. 89 (b)),
When the first privilege is given, the effect executing means is a means for executing the expected effect N times (N is a natural number of 2 or more) with a higher probability than the probability of executing the expected effect once. (For example, FIG. 89 (b)),
This is the 29th preferred configuration.

According to this 29th preferred configuration, when the privilege is given by a plurality of expected productions, even if the size of the privilege is smaller than that when the privilege is given by one expected production, N -It is possible to reduce the disappointment in the expected production up to the first time.

In the tenth basic configuration or the 29th preferred configuration,
It is provided with an operating means operated by the player (for example, an operating button 2171).
When the expected effect is executed N times (N is a natural number of 2 or more), the Nth expected effect is a pre-operation effect (for example, a resurrection effect 2) that is executed before the operation on the operating means is performed. And a post-operation effect (for example, revival effect 2-a, 2-b) executed after the operation on the operation means is performed.
The pre-operation effect is an effect that encourages an operation on the operation means.
The post-operation effect is an effect including the first expected effect.
This is the thirtieth suitable configuration.

According to the thirtieth preferred configuration, the result of the Nth expected effect is notified in the wake of the operation on the operating means, so that the player can be encouraged to operate on the operating means.

In the thirtieth preferred configuration,
When the effect executing means executes the expected effect N times (N is a natural number of 2 or more), the end effect (for example, end effect 2) indicating the end of a predetermined state is performed in the Nth expected effect. It ’s a way to do it,
The effect executing means is a means for executing both the pre-operation effect and the end effect after executing the pre-operation effect when the operation for the operation means is not performed.
This is the 31st preferred configuration.

According to this thirty-first preferred configuration, if there is no operation on the operating means, the post-operation effect is not executed and the end effect is executed, so that there is an effect of promoting the operation of the player on the operating means.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and is various with respect to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Can be modified or modified, and those accompanied by such modification or modification are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

2100 Slot machine 2110, 2111, 2112 Reel 2113 Design display window 2127 Payout number indicator 2130, 2131, 2132 Medal insertion button 2135 Start lever 2137, 2138, 2139 Stop button 2157 Effect image display device 2171 Effect button 2272, 2277 Speaker 2300 Main Control unit 2400 1st sub control unit 2500 2nd sub control unit

Claims (3)

An effect execution means for executing an expected effect indicating whether or not a predetermined privilege has been granted , and
The operation means operated by the player and
It is a game table equipped with
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the first expected effect .
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the second expected effect .
The first expected effect is an effect of displaying the first display indicating that the predetermined privilege has not been given while expecting the predetermined privilege to be given to the predetermined display device.
The first expected effect is an effect of displaying a second display indicating that the first expected effect is completed on the predetermined display device.
The first expected effect is an effect that starts displaying the second display after starting displaying the first display.
The second expected effect is an effect of displaying an operation promotion display prompting an operation on the operation means on the predetermined display device.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing an effect indicating that the predetermined privilege has been granted when there is an operation on the operation means after the operation promotion display is displayed.
The operation promotion display is a display that is started to be displayed after the first display is started.
The second display is a display that is started to be displayed during the display of the operation promotion display.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The operation means is a means capable of accepting an operation after the operation promotion display is started to be displayed.
The second display is a display that is not displayed in a predetermined period after the operation of the operation promotion display can be accepted, and is started to be displayed after the predetermined period ends.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 2 .
The second display is a display that is started to be displayed during the display that is started based on the operation for the operation means when the operation for the operation means is performed.
A game table characterized by that.